US20200171029A1 - Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof - Google Patents

Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20200171029A1
US20200171029A1 US16/568,130 US201916568130A US2020171029A1 US 20200171029 A1 US20200171029 A1 US 20200171029A1 US 201916568130 A US201916568130 A US 201916568130A US 2020171029 A1 US2020171029 A1 US 2020171029A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
azabicyclo
compound
halo
group
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US16/568,130
Inventor
Anthony Estrada
Alan G. Olivero
Snahel Patel
Michael Siu
Joseph Lyssikatos
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Genentech Inc
Original Assignee
Genentech Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Genentech Inc filed Critical Genentech Inc
Priority to US16/568,130 priority Critical patent/US20200171029A1/en
Publication of US20200171029A1 publication Critical patent/US20200171029A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/506—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4427—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A61K31/444—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems containing a six-membered ring with nitrogen as a ring heteroatom, e.g. amrinone
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/445—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine
    • A61K31/4523—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A61K31/4545—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine containing further heterocyclic ring systems containing a six-membered ring with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. pipamperone, anabasine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/535—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. 1,2-oxazines
    • A61K31/5375—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine
    • A61K31/5377—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings, e.g. timolol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/535—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. 1,2-oxazines
    • A61K31/5375—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine
    • A61K31/5386—1,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine spiro-condensed or forming part of bridged ring systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/55—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/55—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole
    • A61K31/553—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole having at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as ring hetero atoms, e.g. loxapine, staurosporine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00—Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/12—Materials from mammals; Compositions comprising non-specified tissues or cells; Compositions comprising non-embryonic stem cells; Genetically modified cells
    • A61K35/30—Nerves; Brain; Eyes; Corneal cells; Cerebrospinal fluid; Neuronal stem cells; Neuronal precursor cells; Glial cells; Oligodendrocytes; Schwann cells; Astroglia; Astrocytes; Choroid plexus; Spinal cord tissue
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/02—Muscle relaxants, e.g. for tetanus or cramps
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/04—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system for myasthenia gravis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08—Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/20—Hypnotics; Sedatives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06—Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00—General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/02—Antidotes
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D451/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 8-azabicyclo [3.2.1] octane, 9-azabicyclo [3.3.1] nonane, or 3-oxa-9-azatricyclo [3.3.1.0<2,4>] nonane ring systems, e.g. tropane or granatane alkaloids, scopolamine; Cyclic acetals thereof
    • C07D451/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing 8-azabicyclo [3.2.1] octane, 9-azabicyclo [3.3.1] nonane, or 3-oxa-9-azatricyclo [3.3.1.0<2,4>] nonane ring systems, e.g. tropane or granatane alkaloids, scopolamine; Cyclic acetals thereof containing 9-azabicyclo [3.3.1] nonane ring systems, e.g. granatane, 2-aza-adamantane; Cyclic acetals thereof
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/08—Bridged systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D471/18—Bridged systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/08—Bridged systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D487/14—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D487/18—Bridged systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/08—Bridged systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D495/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D495/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D495/08—Bridged systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D519/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing more than one system of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring system not provided for in groups C07D453/00 or C07D455/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2300/00—Mixtures or combinations of active ingredients, wherein at least one active ingredient is fully defined in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to organic compounds useful for therapy and/or prophylaxis in a mammal, and in particular to inhibitors of DLK useful for treating neurodegeneration diseases and disorders.
  • Neuron or axon degeneration plays a central role in the proper development of the nervous system and is a hall mark of many neurodegenerative diseases including for example, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), glaucoma, Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease, as well a traumatic injury to the brain and spinal cord.
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • MAP3K12 Dual Leucine Zipper Kinase
  • Neurodegenerative diseases and injuries are devastating to patients and caregivers, and also result in great financial burdens, with annual costs currently exceeding several hundred billion dollars in the United States alone. Most current treatments for these diseases and conditions are inadequate.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently H, F, Cl, Br, I, C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-6 haloalkyl;
  • either A or Cy is a polycyclic carbocycle or polycyclic heterocycle.
  • either A or Cy is a bridged bicyclic carbocycle or bridged bicyclic heterocycle.
  • either A or Cy is a C-linked carbocycle or C-linked heterocycle.
  • X 1 is N.
  • X 1 is C—R 4 .
  • X 2 is N.
  • X 2 is C(H).
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, —CN, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -C 3-8 cycloalkyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L 1 ) 0-1 -C 1-6 alkyl, -(L 1 ) 0-1 -C 1-6 haloalkyl, -(L 1 ) 0-1 -C 1-6 heteroalkyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -6-10 membered aryl and -(L 2 ) 0-1 -5-10 membered heteroaryl, and is optionally substituted.
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, —(O)—C 3-8 cycloalkyl, —(O)-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, —(O)—C 1-6 alkyl and —(O)—C 1-6 haloalkyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of methoxy, monofluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, isobutoxy, tert-butoxy, cyclopropoxy, cyclobutoxy, cyclopentoxy, methyl, monofluoromethyl difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl and cyclopentyl.
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of (L 2 ) 0-1 -phenyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyridyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrimidinyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrazinyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyridazinyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrrolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrazolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -imidazolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -thienyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -thiazolyl and -(L 2 ) 0-1 -thiadiazolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -triazoloyl, -(L 2 ) 0
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of -(L 2 ) 0-1 -phenyl and -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyridinyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • R 4 is —OC(H)(CH 3 )-phenyl wherein said phenyl ring is optionally substituted.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, CN, hydrogen, C 1-4 alkyl and C 1-4 haloalkyl.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each hydrogen.
  • a and Cy are independently selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-furo[3,2-c]pyrrole, 2-azabicyclo[2.
  • A is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-
  • A is selected from the group consisting of 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, and is optionally substituted.
  • A is selected from the group consisting of (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
  • A is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, isopropyl,
  • Cy is selected from the group consisting of 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, 2-Thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, tetrahydro-2H-pyran, 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 3-ox
  • Cy is selected from the group consisting of azetidine, (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
  • Cy is a 3-12 membered carbocycle or a C-linked 3-12 membered heterocycle and X 2 is C(H).
  • Cy is selected from the group consisting of
  • A is C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-6 dialkylamino, and is optionally substituted.
  • A is methyl or ethyl.
  • Cy is C 1-6 alkyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • A is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 R A substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO 2 , —SF 5 , C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-8 haloalkyl, C 1-8 heteroalkyl, -(L A ) 0-1 -3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(L A ) 0-1 -3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L A ) 0-1 -5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(L A ) 0-1 -C 6 aryl, wherein L A is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)—, —C(O)CH 2 —, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 OCH 2
  • Cy is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 R Cy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO 2 , —SF 5 , C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-8 haloalkyl, C 1-8 heteroalkyl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -C 6 aryl, wherein L Cy is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)—, —C(O)CH 2 —, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 OCH 2
  • Cy is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 R Cy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, OH, 2,3-difluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 4-fluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 3-fluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 3,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 3-fluoro-4-methyl-phen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 2,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, oxetane, oxetan-3-yl, thiazole, thiazol-2-yl, —CH 3 CH 2 C( ⁇ O)—, CH 3 C( ⁇ O)—, CF 3 CH 2 —, (HO)C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 —
  • A is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 R A substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, CH 3 O—, CH 3 , cyclopropylmethyl, CF 3 and butyl.
  • said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • R Cy if present replaces a hydrogen atom attached to a carbon or nitrogen atom of the Cy ring.
  • the compound is selected from the group as set forth in Table 1.
  • compositions comprising a compound of Formula I as defined above, or any embodiment thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • the present invention provides for a method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system (CNS) neuron or a portion thereof, the method comprising administering to the CNS neuron a compound of formula I.
  • said administering to the CNS neuron is performed in vitro.
  • said the method further comprises grafting or implanting the CNS neuron into a human patient after administration of the agent.
  • said CNS neuron is present in a human patient.
  • said administering to the CNS neuron comprises administration of said compound of formula I in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • said administering to the CNS neuron is carried out by an administration route selected from the group consisting of parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intralesional, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial interstitial infusion and implanted delivery device.
  • said method further comprising administering one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
  • said administering of a compound of formula I results in a decrease in JNK phosphorylation, JNK activity and/or JNK expression.
  • said the administering of a compound of formula I results in a decrease of cJun phosphorylation, cJun activity, and/or cJun expression.
  • said the administering of a compound of formula I results in a decrease in p38 phosphorylation, p38 activity, and/or p38 expression.
  • the present invention provides for a method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system (CNS) neuron in a patient having or at risk of developing a neurodegenerative disease or condition comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • CNS central nervous system
  • the present invention provides for a method for decreasing or preventing one or more symptoms of a neurodegenerative disease or condition in a patient suffering therefrom comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the present invention provides for a method for decreasing the progression of a neurodegenerative disease or condition in a patient suffering therefrom comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • said neurodegenerative disease of condition is selected from the group consisting of: Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), ischemia, stroke, intracranial hemorrhage, cerebral hemorrhage, trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes, cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies
  • said neurodegenerative disease of condition in a patient is selected from the group consisting of: Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, and amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS),
  • said the compound of formula I is administered in combination with one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
  • alkyl by itself or as part of another substituent, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., C 1-8 means one to eight carbons).
  • alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, and the like.
  • alkenyl refers to an unsaturated alkyl radical having one or more double bonds.
  • alkynyl refers to an unsaturated alkyl radical having one or more triple bonds.
  • unsaturated alkyl groups include linear and branched groups including vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers.
  • cycloalkyl refers to hydrocarbon ring system having specified overall number of ring atoms (e.g., 3 to 12 ring atoms in a 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl or C 3-12 cycloalkyl) and being fully saturated or having no more than one double bond between ring vertices for a 3-5 membered cycloalkyl and being saturated or having no more than two double bonds between ring vertices for 6 or larger membered cycloalkyl.
  • the monocyclic or polycyclic ring may be optionally substituted with one or more oxo groups.
  • cycloalkyl As used herein, “cycloalkyl,” “carbocyclic,” or “carbocycle” is also meant to refer to polycyclic (including fused and bridged bicyclic, fused and bridged polyclic and spirocyclic) hydrocarbon ring system such as, for example, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, pinane, bicyclo[2.2.2]octane, adamantane, norborene, spirocyclic C 5-12 alkane, etc.
  • the terms, “alkenyl,” “alkynyl,” “cycloalkyl,”, “carbocycle,” and “carbocyclic,” are meant to include mono and polyhalogenated variants thereof.
  • heteroalkyl by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical, consisting of the stated number of carbon atoms and from one to three heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si and S, and wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms can optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom can optionally be quaternized.
  • the heteroatom(s) O, N and S can be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group.
  • the heteroatom Si can be placed at any position of the heteroalkyl group, including the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule.
  • a “heteroalkyl” can contain up to three units of unsaturation, and also include mono- and poly-halogenated variants, or combinations thereof. Examples include —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—CF 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—CH 3 , —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 3 , —S(O)—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —S(O) 2 —CH 3 , —CH ⁇ CH—O—CH 3 , —Si(CH 3 ) 3 , —CH 2 —CH ⁇ N—OCH 3 , and —CH ⁇ CH ⁇ N(CH 3 )—CH 3 . Up to two heteroatoms can be consecutive, such as, for example, —CH 2 —NH—OCH 3 and —CH 2 —O—Si(CH
  • heterocycloalkyl refers to a saturated or partially unsaturated ring system radical having from the indicated number of overall number of stated ring atoms and containing from one to five heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized, as ring atoms (e.g., a 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl that would have 3 to 12 ring atoms and include at least one heteroatom, which also could be referred to as a C 2-11 heterocycloalkyl).
  • a “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” ring system can be a monocyclic or a fused, bridged, or spirocyclic polycyclic (including a fused bicyclic, bridged bicyclic or spirocyclic) ring system.
  • the monocyclic or polycyclic ring may be optionally substituted with one or more oxo groups.
  • a “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through one or more ring carbons or heteroatoms.
  • heterocycloalkyl examples include pyrrolidine, piperidine, N-methylpiperidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, butyrolactam, valerolactam, imidazolidinone, hydantoin, dioxolane, phthalimide, piperidine, pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione, 1,4-dioxane, morpholine, thiomorpholine, thiomorpholine-S-oxide, thiomorpholine-S,S-oxide, piperazine, pyran, pyridone, 3-pyrroline, thiopyran, pyrone, tetrahydrofuran, tetrhydrothiophene, quinuclidine, tropane, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.
  • alkylene by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical derived from an alkane, as exemplified by —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, and can be branched. Typically, an alkyl (or alkylene) group will have from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, with those groups having 10 or fewer carbon atoms being preferred in the present invention.
  • alkenylene and alkynylene refer to the unsaturated forms of “alkylene” having double or triple bonds, respectively.
  • Alkylene”, “alkenylene” and “alkynylene” are also meant to include mono and poly-halogenated variants.
  • heteroalkylene by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical, saturated or unsaturated or polyunsaturated, derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified by —CH 2 —CH 2 —S—CH 2 CH 2 — and —CH 2 —S—CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—CH 2 —, —CH 2 —CH ⁇ C(H)CH 2 —O—CH 2 — and —S—CH 2 —C ⁇ C—.
  • heteroalkylene is also meant to include mono and poly-halogenated variants.
  • alkoxylene and “aminoalkylene” and “thioalkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical, saturated or unsaturated or polyunsaturated, derived from alkoxy, alkylamino and alkylthio, respectively, as exemplified by —OCH 2 CH 2 —, —O—CH 2 —CH ⁇ CH—, —N(H)CH 2 C(H)(CH 3 )CH 2 — and —S—CH 2 —C ⁇ C—.
  • alkoxylene and “aminoalkylene” and “thioalkylene” are meant to include mono and poly halogenated variants
  • alkoxy alkylamino and “alkylthio”, are used in their conventional sense, and refer to those alkyl groups attached to the remainder of the molecule via an oxygen atom (“oxy”), an amino group (“amino”) or thio group, and further include mono- and poly-halogenated variants thereof. Additionally, for dialkylamino groups, the alkyl portions can be the same or different.
  • halo or “halogen,” by themselves or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine atom. Additionally, terms such as “haloalkyl,” are meant to include monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl.
  • C 1-4 haloalkyl is mean to include trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, difluoromethyl, and the like.
  • (halo)alkyl” as used herein includes optionally halogenated alkyl. Thus the term “(halo)alkyl” includes both alkyl and haloalkyl (e.g., monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl).
  • aryl means, unless otherwise stated, a polyunsaturated, typically aromatic, hydrocarbon ring, which can be a single ring or multiple rings (up to three rings) which are fused together.
  • heteroaryl refers to aryl ring(s) that contain from one to five heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized.
  • a heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom.
  • Non-limiting examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and biphenyl, while non-limiting examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimindinyl, triazinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalaziniyl, benzotriazinyl, purinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyrazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, isobenzofuryl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, benzotriazinyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl, imidazopyridines, benzothiaxolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, indolyl, quinoly
  • Substituents for the alkyl radicals can be a variety of groups including, but not limited to, -halogen, ⁇ O, —OR′, —NR′R′′, —SR′, —SiR′R′′R′′′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO 2 R′, —CONR′R′′, —OC(O)NR′R′′, —NR′′C(O)R′, —NR′′′C(O)NR′R′′, —NR′′C(O) 2 R′, —NHC(NH 2 ) ⁇ NH, —NR′C(NH 2 ) ⁇ NH, —NHC(NH 2 ) ⁇ NR′, —NR′′′C(NR′R′′) ⁇ N—CN, —NR′′′C(NR′R′′) ⁇ NOR′, —
  • R′, R′′ and R′′′ each independently refer groups including, for example, hydrogen, unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl, unsubstituted heteroalkyl, unsubstituted aryl, aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens, unsubstituted C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy or C 1-6 thioalkoxy groups, or unsubstituted aryl-C 1-4 alkyl groups, unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, among others.
  • R′ and R′′ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring.
  • —NR′R′′ is meant to include 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl.
  • Other substitutents for alkyl radicals, including heteroalkyl, alkylene, include for example, ⁇ O, ⁇ NR′, ⁇ N—OR′, ⁇ N—CN, ⁇ NH, wherein R′ include substituents as described above.
  • alkyl radicals including those groups often referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl and cycloalkyl
  • alkylene linker e.g., —(CH 2 ) 1-4 —NR′R′′ for alkylene
  • the alkylene linker includes halo variants as well.
  • the linker “—(CH 2 ) 1-4 —” when used as part of a substituent is meant to include difluoromethylene, 1,2-difluoroethylene, etc.
  • substituents for the aryl and heteroaryl groups are varied and are generally selected from the group including, but not limited to, -halogen, —OR′, —OC(O)R′, —NR′R′′, —SR′, —R′, —CN, —NO 2 , —CO 2 R′, —CONR′R′′, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)NR′R′′, —NR′′C(O)R′, —NR′′C(O) 2 R′, —NR′C(O)NR′′R′′′, —NHC(NH 2 ) ⁇ NH, —NR′C(NH 2 ) ⁇ NH, —NHC(NH 2 ) ⁇ NR′, —S(O)R′, —S(O) 2 R′, —S(O) 2 NR′R′′,—NR'S(O) 2 R′′, —N 3 , perfluoro-C 1-4 alkoxy, and perfluoro-
  • substituents include each of the above aryl substituents attached to a ring atom by an alkylene tether of from 1-4 carbon atoms.
  • a substituent for the aryl or heteroaryl group contains an alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene linker (e.g., —(CH 2 ) 1-4 —NR′R′′ for alkylene)
  • the alkylene linker includes halo variants as well.
  • the linker “—(CH 2 ) 1-4 —” when used as part of a substituent is meant to include difluoromethylene, 1,2-difluoroethylene, etc.
  • heteroatom is meant to include oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S) and silicon (Si).
  • C-linked means that the group that the term describes is attached the remainder of the molecule through a ring carbon atom.
  • N-linked means that the group that the term describes is attached to the remainder of the molecule through a ring nitrogen atom.
  • chiral refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
  • stereoisomers refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.
  • a wavy line “ ” that intersects a bond in a chemical structure fragment indicates the point of attachment of the bond to which the wavy bond intersects in the chemical structure fragment to the remainder of a molecule or structural formula.
  • the representation of a group e.g., X d in parenthesis followed by a subscript integer range (e.g., (X d ) 0-2 ) means that the group can have the number of occurrences as designated by the integer range.
  • (X d ) 0-1 means the group X d can be absent or can occur one time.
  • Diastereomer refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers can separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.
  • Enantiomers refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.
  • the compounds of the invention can contain asymmetric or chiral centers, and therefore exist in different stereoisomeric forms. It is intended that all stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, including but not limited to, diastereomers, enantiomers and atropisomers, as well as mixtures thereof such as racemic mixtures, form part of the present invention.
  • optically active compounds i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light.
  • the prefixes D and L, or R and S are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s).
  • the prefixes d and 1 or (+) and ( ⁇ ) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with ( ⁇ ) or 1 meaning that the compound is levorotatory.
  • a compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory.
  • these stereoisomers are identical except that they are mirror images of one another.
  • a specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture.
  • a 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which can occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process.
  • the terms “racemic mixture” and “racemate” refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.
  • tautomer or “tautomeric form” refers to structural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible via a low energy barrier.
  • proton tautomers also known as prototropic tautomers
  • Valence tautomers include interconversions by reorganization of some of the bonding electrons.
  • solvate refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of the invention.
  • solvents that form solvates include, but are not limited to, water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, and ethanolamine.
  • hydrate refers to the complex where the solvent molecule is water.
  • protecting group refers to a substituent that is commonly employed to block or protect a particular functional group on a compound.
  • an “amino-protecting group” is a substituent attached to an amino group that blocks or protects the amino functionality in the compound.
  • Suitable amino-protecting groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ) and 9-fluorenylmethylenoxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • a “hydroxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of a hydroxy group that blocks or protects the hydroxy functionality. Suitable protecting groups include acetyl and silyl.
  • a “carboxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of the carboxy group that blocks or protects the carboxy functionality.
  • Common carboxy-protecting groups include phenylsulfonylethyl, cyanoethyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl, 2-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethyl, 2-(p-nitrophenylsulfenyl)ethyl, 2-(diphenylphosphino)-ethyl, nitroethyl and the like.
  • protecting groups and their use see P.G.M. Wuts and T.W. Greene, Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis 4 th edition, Wiley-Interscience, New York, 2006.
  • mammal includes, but is not limited to, humans, mice, rats, guinea pigs, monkeys, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, and sheep.
  • salts is meant to include salts of the active compounds which are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases (e.g., those salts that are pharmaceutically acceptable), depending on the particular substituents found on the compounds described herein.
  • base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent.
  • salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable inorganic bases include aluminum, ammonium, calcium, copper, ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic, manganous, potassium, sodium, zinc and the like.
  • Salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable organic bases include salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, including substituted amines, cyclic amines, naturally-occurring amines and the like, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine and the like.
  • acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from relatively nontoxic organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like.
  • salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like (see, for example, Berge, S. M., et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts”, Journal of Pharmaceutical Science, 1977, 66, 1-19).
  • Certain specific compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.
  • the neutral forms of the compounds can be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner.
  • the parent form of the compound differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the salts are equivalent to the parent form of the compound for the purposes of the present invention.
  • the present invention provides compounds which are in a prodrug form.
  • prodrug refers to those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present invention.
  • prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present invention by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment. For example, prodrugs can be slowly converted to the compounds of the present invention when placed in a transdermal patch reservoir with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.
  • Prodrugs of the invention include compounds wherein an amino acid residue, or a polypeptide chain of two or more (e.g., two, three or four) amino acid residues, is covalently joined through an amide or ester bond to a free amino, hydroxy or carboxylic acid group of a compound of the present invention.
  • the amino acid residues include but are not limited to the 20 naturally occurring amino acids commonly designated by three letter symbols and also includes phosphoserine, phosphothreonine, phosphotyrosine, 4-hydroxyproline, hydroxylysine, demosine, isodemosine, gamma-carboxyglutamate, hippuric acid, octahydroindole-2-carboxylic acid, statine, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid, penicillamine, ornithine, 3-methylhistidine, norvaline, beta-alanine, gamma-aminobutyric acid, citrulline, homocysteine, homoserine, methyl-alanine, para-benzoylphenylalanine, phenylglycine, propargylglycine, sarcosine, methionine sulfone and tert-butylglycine.
  • prodrugs are also encompassed.
  • a free carboxyl group of a compound of the invention can be derivatized as an amide or alkyl ester.
  • compounds of this invention comprising free hydroxy groups can be derivatized as prodrugs by converting the hydroxy group into a group such as, but not limited to, a phosphate ester, hemisuccinate, dimethylaminoacetate, or phosphoryloxymethyloxycarbonyl group, as outlined in Fleisher, D. et al., (1996) Improved oral drug delivery: solubility limitations overcome by the use of prodrugs Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 19:115.
  • Carbamate prodrugs of hydroxy and amino groups are also included, as are carbonate prodrugs, sulfonate esters and sulfate esters of hydroxy groups.
  • Derivatization of hydroxy groups as (acyloxy)methyl and (acyloxy)ethyl ethers, wherein the acyl group can be an alkyl ester optionally substituted with groups including, but not limited to, ether, amine and carboxylic acid functionalities, or where the acyl group is an amino acid ester as described above, are also encompassed.
  • Prodrugs of this type are described in J. Med. Chem., (1996), 39:10.
  • More specific examples include replacement of the hydrogen atom of the alcohol group with a group such as (C 1-6 )alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-((C 1-6 )alkanoyloxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-((C 1-6 )alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (C 1-6 )alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl, N—(C 1-6 )alkoxycarbonylaminomethyl, succinoyl, (C 1-6 )alkanoyl, alpha-amino(C 1-4 )alkanoyl, arylacyl and alpha-aminoacyl, or alpha-aminoacyl-alpha-aminoacyl, where each alpha-aminoacyl group is independently selected from the naturally occurring L-amino acids, P(O)(OH) 2 , —P(O)(O(C 1-6 )alkyl) 2 or glycosyl (the radical resulting from the removal of a hydroxyl group of
  • prodrug derivatives see, for example, a) Design of Prodrugs, edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985) and Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 42, p. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et al. (Academic Press, 1985); b) A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, edited by Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Chapter 5 “Design and Application of Prodrugs,” by H. Bundgaard p. 113-191 (1991); c) H. Bundgaard, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 8:1-38 (1992); d) H.
  • a “metabolite” refers to a product produced through metabolism in the body of a specified compound or salt thereof. Such products can result for example from the oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, amidation, deamidation, esterification, deesterification, enzymatic cleavage, and the like, of the administered compound.
  • Metabolite products typically are identified by preparing a radiolabelled (e.g., 14 C or 3 H) isotope of a compound of the invention, administering it parenterally in a detectable dose (e.g., greater than about 0.5 mg/kg) to an animal such as rat, mouse, guinea pig, monkey, or to man, allowing sufficient time for metabolism to occur (typically about 30 seconds to 30 hours) and isolating its conversion products from the urine, blood or other biological samples.
  • a detectable dose e.g., greater than about 0.5 mg/kg
  • metabolites In general, analysis of metabolites is done in the same way as conventional drug metabolism studies well known to those skilled in the art.
  • the metabolite products so long as they are not otherwise found in vivo, are useful in diagnostic assays for therapeutic dosing of the compounds of the invention.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical centers) or double bonds; the racemates, diastereomers, geometric isomers, regioisomers and individual isomers (e.g., separate enantiomers) are all intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • the compounds of the present invention can also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compounds.
  • the present invention also embraces isotopically-labeled variants of the present invention which are identical to those recited herein, bur the for the fact that one or more atoms are replace by an atom having the atomic mass or mass number different from the predominant atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature for the atom. All isotopes of any particular atom or element as specified are contemplated within the scope of the compounds of the invention, and their uses.
  • Exemplary isotopes that can be incorporated in to compounds of the invention include istopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine and iodine, such as 2 H (“D”), 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 13 N, 15 N, 15 O, 17 O, 132 P, 33 P, 35 S, 18 F, 36 Cl, 123 I and 125 I.
  • Certain isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention e.g., those labeled with 3 H or 14 C
  • Tritiated ( 3 H) and carbon-14 ( 14 C) isotopes are usefule for their ease of preparation and detectability.
  • isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2 H) may afford certain therapeutic advantages resuting from greater metabolic stability (e.g., increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements) and hence may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Positron emitting isotopes such as 15 O, 13 N, 11 C, and 18 F are useful for positron emission tomography (PET) studies to examine substrate receptor occupancy.
  • Isotopically labeled compounds of the present inventions can generally be prepared by following procedures analogous to those disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples herein below, by substituting an isotopically labeled reagent for a non-isotopically labeled reagent.
  • beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, alleviation of symptoms, diminishment of extent of disease or disorder, stabilized (i.e., not worsening) state of disease or disorder, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state or disorder, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable.
  • Treatment can also mean prolonging survival as compared to expected survival if not receiving treatment.
  • Those in need of treatment include those already with the disease or disorder as well as those prone to have the disease or disorder or those in which the disease or disorder is to be prevented.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount means an amount of a compound of the present invention that (i) treats or prevents the particular disease, condition, or disorder, (ii) attenuates, ameliorates, or eliminates one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder, or (iii) prevents or delays the onset of one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder described herein.
  • a therapeutically effective amount is an amount of a chemical entity described herein sufficient to significantly decrease or delay neuronal cell death.
  • administering refers to contacting a neuron or portion therof with a compound described herein. This includes administration of the compound to a subject (e.g., a patient, mammal) in which the neuron or portion therof is present, as well as introducing the inhibitor into a medium in which a neuro or portion thereof is cultured.
  • patient refers to any mammal, including humans, higher non-human primates, rodenst domestic and farm animals such as cow, horses, dogs and cats.
  • the patient is a human patient.
  • bioavailability refers to the systemic availability (i.e., blood/plasma levels) of a given amount of drug administered to a patient. Bioavailability is an absolute term that indicates measurement of both the time (rate) and total amount (extent) of drug that reaches the general circulation from an administered dosage form.
  • preventing axon degeneration include (i) the ability to inhibit or presenve axon or neuron degeration in patients diagnosed as having a neurodegerative disease or risk of developing a neurodegenerative disease and (ii) the ability to inhibit or prevent further axon or neuron degeneration in patients who are already suffering from, or have symptoms of a neurodegenerative disease.
  • Preventing axon or neuron degeneration includes decreasing or inhbiting axon or neuron degeneration, which may be characterized by complete or partial inhibition or neuron or axon degeneration. This can be assessed, for example, by analysis of neurological function.
  • the above-listed terms also include in vitro and ex vivo methods. Further, the pharases “preventing neuron degeneration” and “inhibiting neuron degeneration” in clued such inhibiton with respect to the entire neuron or a portion thereof, such as the neuron ell body, axons and dendrites.
  • the administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or even 100% decrease in one or more symptoms of a disorder of the nervous system, a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an inusry to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical or chemical trauma, pain; and ocular related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder (e.g., tremors, slowness of movement, ataxia, loss of balance, depressioin, decreased cognitive function, short term memory loss, long term memory loss, confusion, changes in personality, language difficultities, loss of sensory perception, sensitivity to touch, numbness in extremities, muscle weakness, muscle paralysis, muscle cramps, muscle spasms, significant changes in eating habits, excessive fear or worry,
  • the administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in a neuron population or in a subject compared to the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in neuron population or in a subject that is not administered the one or more of the agents described herein.
  • a 10% decrease e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease
  • the number of neurons or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof
  • the administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the likelihood of developing a disorder of the nervous system; a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, pain; an ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder in a subject or a subject population compared to a control subject or population not treated with the one or more compounds described herein.
  • a 10% decrease e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease
  • neuron denotes nervous system cells that include a central cell body or soma, and two types of extensions or projections: dendrites, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed to the cell body, and axons, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed from the cell body to effector cells, such as target neurons or muscle.
  • Neurons can convey information from tissues and organs into the central nervous system (afferent or sensory neurons) and transmit signals from the central nervous systems to effector cells (efferent or motor neurons).
  • Other neurons designated interneurons, connect neurons within the central nervous system (the brain and spinal column).
  • Certain specific examples of neuron types that may be subject to treatment according to the invention include cerebellar granule neurons, dorsal root ganglion neurons, and cortical neurons.
  • the present invention provides for novel compounds.
  • Embodiment 1 abbreviated as “E1”
  • the invention provides for compounds of Formula I (I):
  • a compound according to E1, wherein either A or Cy is a polycyclic carbocycle or polycyclic heterocycle.
  • E3. A compound according to E1 or E2, wherein X 1 is N.
  • E4. A compound according to E1 or E2, wherein X 1 is C—R 4 .
  • E5. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3 or E4, wherein X 2 is N.
  • E6. A compound of claim, E1, E2, E3 or E4, wherein X 2 is C(H). E7.
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, —CN, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -C 3-8 cycloalkyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L 1 ) 0-1 -C 1-6 alkyl, -(L 1 ) 0-1 -C 1-6 haloalkyl, -(L 1 ) 0-1 -C 1-6 heteroalkyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -6-10 membered aryl and -(L 2 ) 0-1 -5-10 membered heteroaryl, and is optionally substituted.
  • E8 A compound according to claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6 or E7, wherein R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, —(O)—C 3-8 cycloalkyl, —(O)-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, —(O)—C 1-6 alkyl and —(O)—C 1-6 haloalkyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, C 3-8 cycloalkyl, 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, —(O)—C 3-8 cycloalkyl, —(O)-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, —(O)—C
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of methoxy, monofluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, isobutoxy, tert-butoxy, cyclopropoxy, cyclobutoxy, cyclopentoxy, methyl, monofluoromethyl difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl and cyclopentyl.
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of (L 2 ) 0-1 -phenyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyridyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrimidinyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrazinyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyridazinyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrrolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyrazolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -imidazolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -thienyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -thiazolyl and -(L 2 ) 0-1 -thiadiazolyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -triazoloyl, -(L 2 ) 0-1 -ox
  • E11 A compound of claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6, E7 or E10, wherein R 4 is selected from the group consisting of -(L 2 ) 0-1 -phenyl and -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyridinyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of -(L 2 ) 0-1 -phenyl and -(L 2 ) 0-1 -pyridinyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • E12 A compound of claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6, E7, E10 or E11, wherein R 4 is —OC(H)(CH 3 )-phenyl wherein said phenyl ring is optionally substituted.
  • E13 A compound of claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6, E7, E10 or E11, wherein R 4 is —OC(H)(CH 3 )-phenyl wherein said phenyl ring is optionally substituted.
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are each hydrogen.
  • E17 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15 or E16, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, and is optionally substituted.
  • A is selected from the group consisting of 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, and is optionally substituted.
  • E20 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16, E17, E18 or E19, wherein Cy is selected from the group consisting of 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, 2-Thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]hept
  • E23 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein A is C 1-6 alkyl or C 1-6 dialkylamino, and is optionally substituted.
  • E24 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein A is methyl or ethyl.
  • E25 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein Cy is C 1-6 alkyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • Cy is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 R Cy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO 2 , —SF 5 , C 1-8 alkyl, C 1-8 haloalkyl, C 1-8 heteroalkyl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(L Cy ) 0-1 -C 6 aryl, wherein L Cy is selected from the group consisting o —C(O)—, —C(O)CH 2 —,—OCH 2 —
  • E28 A compound of claim of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E20, E21, E24, E25 or E26, wherein Cy is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 R Cy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, OH, 2,3-difluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 4-fluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 3-fluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 3,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 3-fluoro-4-methyl-phen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, 2,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C( ⁇ O)—, oxetane, oxetan-3-yl, thiazole, thiazol-2-yl, —CH 3 CH
  • E29 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16, E17, E18, E23 or E26, wherein A is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 R A substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, CH 3 O—, CH 3 , cyclopropylmethyl, CF 3 and butyl.
  • a substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, CH 3 O—, CH 3 , cyclopropylmethyl, CF 3 and butyl.
  • E31 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E20, E21, E22, E25, E27, E28 or E29, wherein said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • E32 A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E25, E16, E27, E18, E19, E20, E21, E22, E24, E26, E27, E28 or E29, wherein said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • R Cy if present replaces a hydrogen atom attached to a carbon or nitrogen atom of the Cy ring E33.
  • a compound of claim 1 selected from the group as set forth in Table 1.
  • Suitable amino-protecting groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBz) and 9-fluorenylmethylenoxycarbonyl (Fmoc).
  • BOC t-butoxycarbonyl
  • CBz benzyloxycarbonyl
  • Fmoc 9-fluorenylmethylenoxycarbonyl
  • compounds or intermediates of the inventions can be prepared by displacement of a halogen atom from a dihalothiopyrimidine compound (i) with an amine group under basic conditions. Further treatment of the alkylthio compound (ii) under oxidative conditions provides the oxidized sulfone (iii) compound.
  • a Suzuki-Miyaura coupling reaction between (iii) and a boronate reagent (iv) with a Pd(O) catalyst yields compounds and or intermediates of the invention (v) (See, Miyaura, N.; Suzuki, A. Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-2483).
  • compounds or intermediates of the invention can be prepared by reaction of a trihalo pyrimidine (vi) with a boronate ester under Pd(O) coupling conditions to provide biheteroaryl (vii). Subsequent sequential displacement of a halogens atom of vii with an the same of different amine reagents under basic conditions, provide biheteroaryl compounds (ix).
  • compounds or intermediates of the invention can be prepared by Suzuki-Miyaura coupling of dichloroodopyridine (x) with an amine under Pd(0) catalyzed conditions (See, Hartwig, J. F. (1997), “Palladium-Catalyzed Amination of Aryl Halides: Mechanism and Rational Catalyst Design”, Synlett 4: 329-340). Displacement of a chloro group in xi with an amine followed by Suzuki coupling of the resultant product (xii) with a boronate ester (iv-b) provides compounds and or intermediates of the invention xiii.
  • compounds and or intermediates of the invention can be prepared by treating a R substituted dichloro compound (xiv) with an amine under base conditions to produce compound xv. Subsequent treatment of compound xv under Pd(O) catalyst coupling conditions provides compounds and or intermediates of the inventions (xvi).
  • compositions and medicaments comprising a compound of Formula I or any subformula or any embodiment thereof and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • the compositions of the invention can be used for inhibiting DLK activity in patients (e.g., humans) pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • composition is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable it is meant the carrier, diluent or excipient must be compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not deleterious to the recipient thereof.
  • the invention provides for pharmaceutical compositions (or medicaments) comprising a compound of Formula I (or stereoisomers, geometric isomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, isotopes, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, or prodrugs thereof) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • the invention provides for preparing compositions (or medicaments) comprising compounds of the invention.
  • the invention provides for administering compounds of Formula I or I—I and compositions comprising compounds of Formula I or any embodiment thereof to a patient (e.g., a human patient) in need thereof.
  • compositions are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice.
  • Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners.
  • the effective amount of the compound to be administered will be governed by such considerations, and is the minimum amount necessary to inhibit DLK activity as required to prevent or treat the undesired disease or disorder, such as for example, neurodegeneration, amyloidosis, formation of neurofibrillary tangles, or undesired cell growth. For example, such amount may be below the amount that is toxic to normal cells, or the mammal as a whole.
  • the therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the invention administered parenterally per dose will be in the range of about 0.01-100 mg/kg, alternatively about e.g., 0.1 to 20 mg/kg of patient body weight per day, with the typical initial range of compound used being 0.3 to 15 mg/kg/day.
  • the daily does is, in certain embodiments, given as a single daily dose or in divided doses two to six times a day, or in sustained release form. In the case of a 70 kg adult human, the total daily dose will generally be from about 7 mg to about 1,400 mg. This dosage regimen may be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response.
  • the compounds may be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be administered in any convenient administrative form, e.g., tablets, powders, capsules, solutions, dispersions, suspensions, syrups, sprays, suppositories, gels, emulsions, patches, etc.
  • Such compositions may contain components conventional in pharmaceutical preparations, e.g., diluents, carriers, pH modifiers, sweeteners, bulking agents, and further active agents.
  • the compounds of the invention may be administered by any suitable means, including oral, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal, transdermal, parenteral, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intradermal, intrathecal and epidural and intranasal, and, if desired for local treatment, intralesional administration.
  • Parenteral infusions include intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intraocular, intralesional or subcutaneous administration.
  • compositions comprising compounds of Formula I any embodiment thereof are normally formulated in accordance with standard pharmaceutical practice as a pharmaceutical composition.
  • a typical formulation is prepared by mixing a compound of the present invention and a diluent, carrier or excipient. Suitable diluents, carriers and excipients are well known to those skilled in the art and are described in detail in, e.g., Ansel, Howard C., et al., Ansel's Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2004; Gennaro, Alfonso R., et al. Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2000; and Rowe, Raymond C.
  • the formulations may also include one or more buffers, stabilizing agents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents, emulsifiers, suspending agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants, sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents, diluents and other known additives to provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in the manufacturing of the pharmaceutical product (i.e., medicament).
  • buffers stabilizing agents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents, emulsifiers, suspending agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants, sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents, diluents and other known additives to provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in the manufacturing
  • Suitable carriers, diluents and excipients are well known to those skilled in the art and include materials such as carbohydrates, waxes, water soluble and/or swellable polymers, hydrophilic or hydrophobic materials, gelatin, oils, solvents, water and the like.
  • the particular carrier, diluent or excipient used will depend upon the means and purpose for which a compound of the present invention is being applied.
  • Solvents are generally selected based on solvents recognized by persons skilled in the art as safe (GRAS) to be administered to a mammal.
  • safe solvents are non-toxic aqueous solvents such as water and other non-toxic solvents that are soluble or miscible in water.
  • Suitable aqueous solvents include water, ethanol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols (e.g., PEG 400, PEG 300), etc. and mixtures thereof.
  • the formulations can also include one or more buffers, stabilizing agents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents, emulsifiers, suspending agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants, sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents and other known additives to provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in the manufacturing of the pharmaceutical product (i.e., medicament).
  • Acceptable diluents, carriers, excipients and stabilizers are nontoxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed, and include buffers such as phosphate, citrate and other organic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid and methionine; preservatives (such as octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride; hexamethonium chloride; benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride; phenol, butyl or benzyl alcohol; alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben; catechol; resorcinol; cyclohexanol; 3-pentanol; and m-cresol); low molecular weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine,
  • a active pharmaceutical ingredient of the invention can also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules and poly-(methylmethacylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions.
  • colloidal drug delivery systems for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules
  • macroemulsions for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules
  • Sustained-release preparations of a compound of the invention can be prepared.
  • suitable examples of sustained-release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules.
  • sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinyl alcohol)), polylactides (U.S. Pat. No.
  • Sustained release compositions also include liposomally entrapped compounds, which can be prepared by methods known per se (Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82:3688, 1985; Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:4030, 1980; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324A).
  • the liposomes are of the small (about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamelar type in which the lipid content is greater than about 30 mol % cholesterol, the selected proportion being adjusted for the optimal therapy.
  • the formulations include those suitable for the administration routes detailed herein.
  • the formulations can conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and can be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Techniques and formulations generally are found in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy: Remington the Science and Practice of Pharmacy (2005) 21st Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philidelphia, Pa. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients.
  • the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers, diluents or excipients or finely divided solid carriers, diluents or excipients, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
  • a typical formulation is prepared by mixing a compound of the present invention and a carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • the formulations can be prepared using conventional dissolution and mixing procedures.
  • the bulk drug substance i.e., compound of the present invention or stabilized form of the compound (e.g., complex with a cyclodextrin derivative or other known complexation agent) is dissolved in a suitable solvent in the presence of one or more of the excipients described above.
  • a compound of the present invention is typically formulated into pharmaceutical dosage forms to provide an easily controllable dosage of the drug and to enable patient compliance with the prescribed regimen.
  • compounds of Formula I or any embodiment thereof may be formulated by mixing at ambient temperature at the appropriate pH, and at the desired degree of purity, with physiologically acceptable carriers, i.e., carriers that are non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed into a galenical administration form.
  • physiologically acceptable carriers i.e., carriers that are non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed into a galenical administration form.
  • the pH of the formulation depends mainly on the particular use and the concentration of compound, but preferably ranges anywhere from about 3 to about 8.
  • a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof is formulated in an acetate buffer, at pH 5.
  • the compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof are sterile.
  • the compound may be stored, for example, as a solid or amorphous composition, as a lyophilized formulation or as an aqueous solution.
  • Formulations of a compound of the invention e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof
  • suitable for oral administration can be prepared as discrete units such as pills, capsules, cachets or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the invention.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered active ingredient moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets can optionally be coated or scored and optionally are formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therefrom.
  • Tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, e.g., gelatin capsules, syrups or elixirs can be prepared for oral use.
  • Formulations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) intended for oral use can be prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions can contain one or more agents including sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preserving agents, in order to provide a palatable preparation. Tablets containing the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipient which are suitable for manufacture of tablets are acceptable.
  • excipients can be, for example, inert diluents, such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, such as maize starch, or alginic acid; binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. Tablets can be uncoated or can be coated by known techniques including microencapsulation to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax can be employed.
  • inert diluents such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium or sodium phosphate
  • granulating and disintegrating agents such as maize starch, or alginic acid
  • binding agents such as starch, ge
  • An example of a suitable oral administration form is a tablet containing about 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 30 mg, 50 mg, 80 mg, 100 mg, 150 mg, 250 mg, 300 mg and 500 mg of the compound of the invention compounded with about 90-30 mg anhydrous lactose, about 5-40 mg sodium croscarmellose, about 5-30 mg polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) K30, and about 1-10 mg magnesium stearate.
  • the powdered ingredients are first mixed together and then mixed with a solution of the PVP.
  • the resulting composition can be dried, granulated, mixed with the magnesium stearate and compressed to tablet form using conventional equipment.
  • An example of an aerosol formulation can be prepared by dissolving the compound, for example 5-400 mg, of the invention in a suitable buffer solution, e.g. a phosphate buffer, adding a tonicifier, e.g. a salt such sodium chloride, if desired.
  • a suitable buffer solution e.g. a phosphate buffer
  • a tonicifier e.g. a salt such sodium chloride
  • the solution may be filtered, e.g., using a 0.2 micron filter, to remove impurities and contaminants.
  • the formulations are preferably applied as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s) in an amount of, for example, 0.075 to 20% w/w.
  • the active ingredient can be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base.
  • the active ingredients can be formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base.
  • the aqueous phase of the cream base can include a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol (including PEG 400) and mixtures thereof.
  • the topical formulations can desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethyl sulfoxide and related analogs.
  • the oily phase of the emulsions of this invention can be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While the phase can comprise merely an emulsifier, it desirably comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat.
  • Emulsifiers and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the invention include Tween® 60, Span® 80, cetostearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl mono-stearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • Aqueous suspensions of a compound of the invention contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions.
  • excipients include a suspending agent, such as sodium carboxymethylcellulose, croscarmellose, povidone, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (
  • the aqueous suspension can also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate
  • coloring agents such as a coloring agent
  • flavoring agents such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • sweetening agents such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Formulations of a compound of the invention can be in the form of a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • a sterile injectable preparation such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • This suspension can be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above.
  • the sterile injectable preparation can also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution in 1,3-butanediol or prepared as a lyophilized powder.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile fixed oils can conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid can likewise be used in the preparation of injectables.
  • a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humans can contain approximately 1 to 1000 mg of active material compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which can vary from about 5 to about 95% of the total compositions (weight:weight).
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be prepared to provide easily measurable amounts for administration.
  • an aqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion can contain from about 3 to 500 ⁇ g of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution in order that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/hr can occur.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous sterile injection solutions which can contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which can include suspending agents and thickening agents.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active ingredient.
  • the active ingredient is preferably present in such formulations in a concentration of about 0.5 to 20% w/w, for example about 0.5 to 10% w/w, for example about 1.5% w/w.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Formulations for rectal administration can be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising for example cocoa butter or a salicylate.
  • Formulations suitable for intrapulmonary or nasal administration have a particle size for example in the range of 0.1 to 500 microns (including particle sizes in a range between 0.1 and 500 microns in increments microns such as 0.5, 1, 30 microns, 35 microns, etc.), which is administered by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage or by inhalation through the mouth so as to reach the alveolar sacs.
  • Suitable formulations include aqueous or oily solutions of the active ingredient.
  • Formulations suitable for aerosol or dry powder administration can be prepared according to conventional methods and can be delivered with other therapeutic agents such as compounds heretofore used in the treatment of disorders as described below.
  • the formulations can be packaged in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, for example sealed ampoules and vials, and can be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water, for injection immediately prior to use.
  • sterile liquid carrier for example water
  • Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions are prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described.
  • Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit daily sub-dose, as herein above recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of the active ingredient.
  • certain embodiments of the invention provide for a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) to traverse the blood-brain barrier.
  • Certain neurodegenerative diseases are associated with an increase in permeability of the blood-brain barrier, such that a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) can be readily introduced to the brain.
  • the blood-brain barrier remains intact, several art-known approaches exist for transporting molecules across it, including, but not limited to, physical methods, lipid-based methods, and receptor and channel-based methods.
  • Physical methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, circumventing the blood-brain barrier entirely, or by creating openings in the blood-brain barrier.
  • Circumvention methods include, but are not limited to, direct injection into the brain (see, e.g., Papanastassiou et al., Gene Therapy 9:398-406, 2002), interstitial infusion/convection-enhanced delivery (see, e.g., Bobo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91 :2076-2080, 1994), and implanting a delivery device in the brain (see, e.g., Gill et al., Nature Med. 9:589-595, 2003; and Gliadel WafersTM, Guildford.
  • direct injection into the brain see, e.g., Papanastassiou et al., Gene Therapy 9:398-406, 2002
  • interstitial infusion/convection-enhanced delivery see, e.g., Bobo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91 :20
  • Methods of creating openings in the barrier include, but are not limited to, ultrasound (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/0038086), osmotic pressure (e.g., by administration of hypertonic mannitol (Neuwelt, E. A., Implication of the Blood-Brain Barrier and its Manipulation, Volumes 1 and 2, Plenum Press, N.Y., 1989)), and permeabilization by, e.g., bradykinin or permeabilizer A-7 (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,112,596, 5,268,164, 5,506,206, and 5,686,416).
  • ultrasound see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/0038086
  • osmotic pressure e.g., by administration of hypertonic mannitol (Neuwelt, E. A., Implication of the Blood-Brain Barrier and its Manipulation, Volumes 1 and 2, Plenum Press,
  • Lipid-based methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, encapsulating the a compound of formula I or I-I (or an embodiment thereof) in liposomes that are coupled to antibody binding fragments that bind to receptors on the vascular endothelium of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2002/0025313), and coating a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) in low-density lipoprotein particles (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0204354) or apolipoprotein E (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0131692).
  • Receptor and channel-based methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, using glucocorticoid blockers to increase permeability of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2002/0065259, 2003/0162695, and 2005/0124533); activating potassium channels (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2005/0089473), inhibiting ABC drug transporters (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
  • the compounds can be administered continuously by infusion into the fluid reservoirs of the CNS, although bolus injection may be acceptable.
  • the inhibitors can be administered into the ventricles of the brain or otherwise introduced into the CNS or spinal fluid. Administration can be performed by use of an indwelling catheter and a continuous administration means such as a pump, or it can be administered by implantation, e.g., intracerebral implantation of a sustained-release vehicle. More specifically, the inhibitors can be injected through chronically implanted cannulas or chronically infused with the help of osmotic minipumps. Subcutaneous pumps are available that deliver proteins through a small tubing to the cerebral ventricles.
  • Highly sophisticated pumps can be refilled through the skin and their delivery rate can be set without surgical intervention.
  • suitable administration protocols and delivery systems involving a subcutaneous pump device or continuous intracerebroventricular infusion through a totally implanted drug delivery system are those used for the administration of dopamine, dopamine agonists, and cholinergic agonists to Alzheimer's disease patients and animal models for Parkinson's disease, as described by Harbaugh, J. Neural Transm. Suppl. 24:271, 1987; and DeYebenes et al., Mov. Disord. 2: 143, 1987.
  • a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) used in the invention are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice.
  • Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners.
  • a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) need not be, but is optionally formulated with one or more agent currently used to prevent or treat the disorder in question. The effective amount of such other agents depends on the amount of a compound of the invention present in the formulation, the type of disorder or treatment, and other factors discussed above.
  • the appropriate dosage of a compound of formula I or I-I (or an embodiment thereof) (when used alone or in combination with other agents) will depend on the type of disease to be treated, the properties of the compound, the severity and course of the disease, whether the compound is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes, previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to the compound, and the discretion of the attending physician.
  • the compound is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments.
  • about 1 ⁇ g/kg to 15 mg/kg (e.g., 0.1 mg/kg-10 mg/kg) of compound can be an initial candidate dosage for administration to the patient, whether, for example, by one or more separate administrations, or by continuous infusion.
  • One typical daily dosage might range from about 1 ⁇ g kg to 100 mg/kg or more, depending on the factors mentioned above. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment would generally be sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs.
  • One exemplary dosage of a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) would be in the range from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg. Thus, one or more doses of about 0.5 mg/kg, 2.0 mg/kg, 4.0 mg/kg, or 10 mg/kg (or any combination thereof) may be administered to the patient.
  • Such doses may be administered intermittently, e.g., every week or every three weeks (e.g., such that the patient receives from about two to about twenty, or, e.g., about six doses of the antibody).
  • An initial higher loading dose, followed by one or more lower doses may be administered.
  • An exemplary dosing regimen comprises administering an initial loading dose of about 4 mg/kg, followed by a weekly maintenance dose of about 2 mg kg of the compound.
  • other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.
  • typical daily dosages might range from, for example, about 1 g/kg to up to 100 mg/kg or more (e.g., about 1 ⁇ g kg to 1 mg/kg, about 1 ⁇ g/kg to about 5 mg/kg, about 1 mg kg to 10 mg/kg, about 5 mg/kg to about 200 mg/kg, about 50 mg/kg to about 150 mg/mg, about 100 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg, and about 200 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg), depending on the factors mentioned above.
  • the clinician will administer a compound until a dosage is reached that results in improvement in or, optimally, elimination of, one or more symptoms of the treated disease or condition. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional assays.
  • One or more agent provided herein may be administered together or at different times (e.g., one agent is administered prior to the administration of a second agent).
  • One or more agent may be administered to a subject using different techniques (e.g., one agent may be administered orally, while a second agent is administered via intramuscular injection or intranasally).
  • One or more agent may be administered such that the one or more agent has a pharmacologic effect in a subject at the same time.
  • one or more agent may be administered, such that the pharmacological activity of the first administered agent is expired prior the administration of one or more secondarily administered agents (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 secondarily administered agents).
  • the invention provides for methods of inhibiting the Dual Leucine Zipper Kinase (DLK) in an in vitro (e.g., a nerve graft of nerve transplant) or in vivo setting (e.g., in a patient) by contacting DLK present in an in vitro or in vivo setting with compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof.
  • DLK Dual Leucine Zipper Kinase
  • the inhibition of DLK signaling or expression with a compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof results in a downstream decrease in JNK phosphorylation (e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 phosphorylation), JNK activity (e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 activity), and/or JNK expression (e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 expression).
  • JNK phosphorylation e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 phosphorylation
  • JNK activity e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 activity
  • JNK expression e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 expression
  • administering one or more compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof according to the methods of the invention can result in decrease in activity of kinase targets downstream of the DLK signalling cascade, e.g, (i) a decrease in JNK phosphorylation, JNK activity, and/or JNK expression, (ii) a decrease in cJun phosphorylation, cJun activity, and/or cJun expression, and/or (iii) a decrease in p38 phosphorylation, p38 activity, and/or p38 expression.
  • Compounds of the invention can be used in methods for inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration.
  • the inhibitors are, therefore, useful in the therapy of, for example, (i) disorders of the nervous system (e.g., neurodegenerative diseases), (ii) conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system, (iii) injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, (iv) pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss, and (vii) psychiatric disorders.
  • disorders of the nervous system e.g., neurodegenerative diseases
  • conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system e.g., a primary effect outside of the nervous system
  • injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma
  • pain e.g., pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss
  • neurodegenerative diseases and conditions that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, progressive bulbar palsy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes (e.g., herniated, ruptured, and prolapsed disk syndromes), cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies, prophyria, mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases (e.g., multiple system atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy, and corticobasal degeneration), dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia, demyelina,
  • the methods of the invention can also be used in the prevention and treatment of ocular-relatcd neurodegeneration and related diseases and conditions, such as glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis.
  • ocular-relatcd neurodegeneration and related diseases and conditions such as glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis.
  • Non-limiting examples of different types of glaucoma that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include primary glaucoma (also known as primary open-angle glaucoma, chronic open-angle glaucoma, chronic simple glaucoma, and glaucoma simplex), low-tension glaucoma, primary angle-closure glaucoma (also known as primary closed-angle glaucoma, narrow-angle glaucoma, pupil-block glaucoma, and acute congestive glaucoma), acute angle-closure glaucoma, chronic angle-closure glaucoma, intermittent angle-closure glaucoma, chronic open-angle closure glaucoma, pigmentary glaucoma, exfoliation glaucoma (also known as pseudoexfoliative glaucoma or glaucoma capsulare), developmental glaucoma (e.g., primary congenital glaucoma and infantile glaucoma), secondary glaucoma (e
  • Examples of types of pain that can be treated according to the methods of the invention include those associated with the following conditions: chronic pain, fibromyalgia, spinal pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, pain from cancer, arthritis, sciatica, headaches, pain from surgery, muscle spasms, back pain, visceral pain, pain from injury, dental pain, neuralgia, such as neuogenic or neuropathic pain, nerve inflammation or damage, shingles, herniated disc, torn ligament, and diabetes.
  • Certain diseases and conditions having primary effects outside of the nervous system can lead to damage to the nervous system, which can be treated according to the methods of the present invention.
  • Examples of such conditions include peripheral neuropathy and neuralgia caused by, for example, diabetes, cancer, AIDS, hepatitis, kidney dysfunction, Colorado tick fever, diphtheria, HIV infection, leprosy, lyme disease, polyarteritis nodosa , rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, Sjogren syndrome, syphilis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and amyloidosis.
  • the methods of the invention can be used in the treatment of nerve damage, such as peripheral neuropathy, which is caused by exposure to toxic compounds, including heavy metals (e.g., lead, arsenic, and mercury) and industrial solvents, as well as drugs including chemotherapeutic agents (e.g., vincristine and cisplatin), dapsone, HIV medications (e.g., Zidovudine, Didanosine.
  • nerve damage such as peripheral neuropathy, which is caused by exposure to toxic compounds, including heavy metals (e.g., lead, arsenic, and mercury) and industrial solvents, as well as drugs including chemotherapeutic agents (e.g., vincristine and cisplatin), dapsone, HIV medications (e.g., Zidovudine, Didanosine.
  • Stavudine, Zalcitabine, Ritonavir, and Amprenavir cholesterol lowering drugs (e.g., Lovastatin, Indapamid, and Gemfibrozil), heart or blood pressure medications (e.g., Amiodarone, Hydralazine, Perhexiline), and Metronidazole.
  • cholesterol lowering drugs e.g., Lovastatin, Indapamid, and Gemfibrozil
  • heart or blood pressure medications e.g., Amiodarone, Hydralazine, Perhexiline
  • Metronidazole e.g., Amiodarone, Hydralazine, Perhexiline
  • the methods of the invention can also be used to treat injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma.
  • the methods can be used in the treatment of peripheral nerve damage caused by physical injury (associated with, e.g., burns, wounds, surgery, and accidents), ischemia, prolonged exposure to cold temperature (e.g., frost-bite), as well as damage to the central nervous system due to, e.g., stroke or intracranial hemorrhage (such as cerebral hemorrhage).
  • the methods of the invention can be used in the prevention or treatment of memory loss such as, for example, age-related memory loss.
  • Types of memory that can be affected by loss, and thus treated according to the invention include episodic memory, semantic memory, short-term memory, and long-term memory.
  • Examples of diseases and conditions associated with memory loss, which can be treated according to the present invention include mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, chemotherapy, stress, stroke, and traumatic brain injury (e.g., concussion).
  • the methods of the invention can also be used in the treatment of psychiatric disorders including, for example, schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, delirium, dementia, mood disorders, bipolar disorder, depression, stress disorder, panic disorder, agoraphobia, social phobia, post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety disorder, and impulse control disorders (e.g., kleptomania, pathological gambling, pyromania, and trichotillomania).
  • psychiatric disorders including, for example, schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obses
  • the methods of the invention can be used to treat nerves ex vivo, which may be helpful in the context of nerve grafts or nerve transplants.
  • the inhibitors described herein can be useful as components of culture media for use in culturing nerve cells in vitro.
  • the invention provides for a method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system (CNS) neuron or a portion thereof, the method comprising administering to the CNS neuron a compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof.
  • CNS central nervous system
  • the administering to the CNS neuron is performed in vitro.
  • the method further comprises grafting or implanting the CNS neuron into a human patient after administration of the agent.
  • the CNS neuron is present in a human patient.
  • the administering to the CNS neuron comprises administration of said compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • the administering to the CNS neuron is carried out by an administration route selected from the group consisting of parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intralesional, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial interstitial infusion and implanted delivery device.
  • the method further comprises administering one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
  • inhibitors can be optionally combined with or administered in concert with each other or other agents known to be useful in the treatment of the relevant disease or condition.
  • inhibitors can be administered in combination with Riluzole (Rilutek), minocycline, insulin-like growth factor 1 (IGF-1), and/or methylcobalamin.
  • inhibitors in the treatment of Parkinson's disease, can be administered with L-dopa, dopamine agonists (e.g., bromocriptine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, cabergoline, apomorphine, and lisuride), dopa decarboxylase inhibitors (e.g., levodopa, benserazide, and carbidopa), and/or MAO-B inhibitors (e.g., selegiline and rasagiline).
  • dopamine agonists e.g., bromocriptine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, cabergoline, apomorphine, and lisuride
  • dopa decarboxylase inhibitors e.g., levodopa, benserazide, and carbidopa
  • MAO-B inhibitors e.g., selegiline and rasagiline
  • inhibitors in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, can be administered with acetylcholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil, galantamine, and rivastigmine) and/or NMDA receptor antagonists (e.g., memantine).
  • acetylcholinesterase inhibitors e.g., donepezil, galantamine, and rivastigmine
  • NMDA receptor antagonists e.g., memantine
  • the combination therapies can involve concurrent or sequential administration, by the same or different routes, as determined to be appropriate by those of skill in the art.
  • the invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and kits comprising combinations as described herein.
  • the invention includes combinations of agents that (i) inhibit degeneration of the neuron cell body, and (ii) inhibit axon degeneration.
  • agents that that (i) inhibit degeneration of the neuron cell body, and (ii) inhibit axon degeneration.
  • inhibitors of GSK and transcription are found to prevent degeneration of neuron cell bodies, while inhibitors of EGFR and p38 MAPK are found to prevent degeneration of axons.
  • the invention includes combinations of inhibitors of GSK and EGFR (and/or p38 MAPK), combinations of transcription inhibitors and EGF (and/or p38 MAPK), and further combinations of inhibitors of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3 ⁇ (GSK3), p38 MAPK, EGFF, phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependentkinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), In channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), and ⁇ -catenin.
  • the inhibitors used in these combinations can be any of those described herein, or other inhibitors of these targets as described in
  • the combination therapy can provide “synergy” and prove “synergistic”, i.e., the effect achieved when the active ingredients used together is greater than the sum of the effects that results from using the compounds separately.
  • a synergistic effect can be attained when the active ingredients are: (1) co-formulated and administered or delivered simultaneously in a combined, unit dosage formulation; (2) delivered by alternation or in parallel as separate formulations; or (3) by some other regimen.
  • a synergistic effect can be attained when the compounds are administered or delivered sequentially, e.g., by different injections in separate syringes, separate pills or capsules, or in separate infusions.
  • an effective dosage of each active ingredient is administered sequentially, i.e., serially
  • effective dosages of two or more active ingredients are administered together.
  • Example conditions for analysis include monitoring on an Agilent 1200 Series LC coupled to a 6140 quadrupole mass spectrometer using a Supelco Ascentis Express C18 column with a linear gradient of 5%-95% acetonitrile/water (with 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid in each mobile phase) within 1.4 minutes and held at 95% for 0.3 minute, or on a PE Sciex API 150 EX using a Phenomenex DNYC monolithic C18 column with a linear gradient of 5%-95% acetonitrile/water (with 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid in each mobile phase) within 5 minutes and held at 95% for 1 minute to determine retention times (R T ) and associated mass ions.
  • R T retention times
  • Step 1 Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]-heptane
  • Step 2 Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo-[2.2.1]heptane
  • Step 3 Synthesis of 6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Step 4 Synthesis of 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4 S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Step 2 Synthesis of (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-chloropyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate
  • Step 3 Synthesis of (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate
  • Step 4 Synthesis of 5-(2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl )-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine
  • Step 5 Synthesis of 1-((1S,4 S)-5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)ethanone
  • Step 1 Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanoy)-3-azaicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • reaction solution was filtered, concentrated and purified by flash column (60% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to afford (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanoyl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (1.5 g, 57.7% yield).
  • Step 2 Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-mercaptopyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Step 3 Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Step 4 Synthesis of (1R,5 S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Step 5 Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Step 6 Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Step 7 Synthesis of (1R,5 S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Step 8 Synthesis of 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1R,5 S,6r)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-6-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Step 9 Synthesis of 1-((1R,5 S,6r)-6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)ethanone
  • Step 1 Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane
  • Step 2 Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-chloropyridin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane
  • Step 3 Synthesis of 5-[6-(3-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-3-yl)-4-[(1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl]-2-pyridyl]-3-(difluoromethoxy)pyridin-2-amine
  • Step 3 Synthesis of 2-chloro-6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)pyridine
  • Step 4 Synthesis of 6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)-5′-(trifluoromethyl)-[2,3′-bipyridin]-6′-amine
  • the reaction mixture was extracted with DCM (3 mL) and H2O (2 mL). The organic phase was removed, dried over sodium sulfate, and passed through a filter. The resulting organic phase was concentrated under vacuum.
  • the crude product was mixed with methanol (1.0 mL) and 4M hydrogen chloride in dioxane (325 uL, 1.3 mmol, 10 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum.
  • Step 1 tert-butyl 3-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate
  • the resulting yellow solution was injected into a separately prepared, nitrogen flushed vessel containing [1,1-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (2.56 g, 3.10 mmol), copper(I) iodide (1.18 g, 6.21 mmol) and 2,6-dichloro-4-iodopyridine (17.0 g, 62.1 mmol) and this mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 19.5 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water (3 ⁇ ).
  • Step 3 6-cyclopropyl-5′-(difluoromethoxy)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)azetidin-3-yl)-[2,3′-bipyridin]-6′-amine
  • the compounds disclosed in Table 1 were prepared following the synthetic steps described in general Methods A-J as described above in Example 1 with modifying the starting reactants and/or intermediates and in those methods as would be known to one skilled in the art in view of the final compound structures to arrive at the compounds in Table 1.
  • the compounds disclosed in Table 1 were tested for DLK inhibitory activity as described in Example 3.
  • DLK TR-FRET inhibition assay DLK kinase reactions (20 ⁇ L) containing 5 nM N-terminally GST-tagged DLK (catalytic domain amino acid 1-520) (Carna Bioscience), 40 nM N-terminally HIS-tagged MKK4 K131M substrate, and 30 ⁇ M ATP in kinase reaction buffer (50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 0.01% Triton X-100, 0.01% Bovine ⁇ -Globulins, 2 mM DTT, 10 mM MgCl 2 and 1 mM EGTA), and testing compound 1:3 serial diluted starting at 20 uM were incubated at ambient temperature for 60 minutes in 384 well OptiPlate (Perkin Elmer).
  • kinase reaction buffer 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 0.01% Triton X-100, 0.01% Bovine ⁇ -Globulins, 2 mM DTT, 10 mM MgCl 2 and 1
  • TR-FRET antibody mixture containing 2 nM anti-phosphorylated MKK4 labeled with Europium cryptate (Cisbio) and 23 nM anti-HIS labeled with D2 (Cisbio) in detection buffer (25 mM Tris pH 7.5, 100 mM NaCl, 100 mM EDTA, 0.01% Tween-20, and 200 mM KF) was added to the reaction mixture.
  • detection buffer 25 mM Tris pH 7.5, 100 mM NaCl, 100 mM EDTA, 0.01% Tween-20, and 200 mM KF

Abstract

The present invention provides for compounds of Formula I and embodiments and salts thereof for the treatment of diseases (e.g., neurodegenerative diseases). R1, R2, R3, X1, X2, A and Cy variable in Formula all have the meaning as defined herein.
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00001

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
  • This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/852,235, filed Dec. 22, 2017, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/041,375, filed Feb. 11, 2016, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,028,954, which is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/267,011, filed May 1, 2014, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,266,862, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Appl. No. 61/817,966, filed on May 1, 2013, each of which are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
    • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to organic compounds useful for therapy and/or prophylaxis in a mammal, and in particular to inhibitors of DLK useful for treating neurodegeneration diseases and disorders.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Neuron or axon degeneration plays a central role in the proper development of the nervous system and is a hall mark of many neurodegenerative diseases including for example, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), glaucoma, Alzheimer's disease, and Parkinson's disease, as well a traumatic injury to the brain and spinal cord. Recent patent publication WO2011/050192, incorporated herein by reference, describes the role of the Dual Leucine Zipper Kinase (DLK), also referred to as MAP3K12, to cause neuronal cell death. Neurodegenerative diseases and injuries are devastating to patients and caregivers, and also result in great financial burdens, with annual costs currently exceeding several hundred billion dollars in the United States alone. Most current treatments for these diseases and conditions are inadequate. Adding to the urgency of the problems created by these diseases is the fact that many such diseases are age related, and thus their incidence is increasing rapidly as population demographics change. There is a great need for the development of effective approaches to treating neurodegenerative diseases and nervous system injuries, including for example, through the inhibitors of DLK in neurons.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • In one aspect the present inventions provides for compounds of Formula I (I):
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00002
  • or salts thereof wherein
  • R1, R2 and R3 are each independently H, F, Cl, Br, I, C1-6 alkyl or C1-6 haloalkyl;
    • X1 is N or C—R4, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, —Br, I -(L1)0-1-C1-6 alkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 haloalkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 heteroalkyl, -(L2)0-1-C3-8 cycloalkyl, -(L2)0-1-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L2)0-1-6-10 membered aryl, -(L2)0-1-5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein L1 is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —N(H)—, —S—, —N(C1-6 alkyl)-, ═O, and L2 is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —N(H)—, —N(C1-6 alkyl)-, —S—, ═O, C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 alkenylene, C1-4 alkynylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene and C1-4 heteroalkylene, and wherein R4 is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with RR4 substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, 3-5 membered cycloalkyl, 3-5 membered heterocycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylamino, C1-6 dialkylamino, C1-6 alkylthio, ═O, —NH2, —CN, —NO2 and —SF5;
    • X2 is N or CH;
    • A is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 dialkylamino, 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein A is optionally substituted with 1-5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LA)0-1-C6 aryl, -(LA)0-1-NRR1aRR1b, -(LA)0-1-ORR1a, -(LA)0-1-SRR1a, -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═Y1)ORR1c, -(LA)0-1-OC(═O)N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═O)N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-C(═O)N(RR1a(RR1aRR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═O)RR1b, -(LA)0-1-C(═O)ORR1a, -(LA)0-1-OC(═O)RR1a, -(LA)0-1-P(═O)(ORR1a)(a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-S(O)12RR1c, -(LA)0-1-S(O)12N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)S(O)1-2N(RR1a)(RR1b) and -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)S(O)1-2(RR1c), wherein LA is selected from the group consisting of C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 heteroalkylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene, C2-4 alkenylene, and C2-4 alkynylene; wherein RR1a and RR1b are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3-8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl; RR1c is selected from the group consisting of C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3 to 8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, and wherein RA is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with RRA substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino; and
    • Cy is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein Cy is optionally substituted on carbon or heteroatoms with RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LY)0-1-phenyl, -(LCy)0-1-NRRCaRRCb, -(LCy)0-1-ORRCa, -(LCy)0-1-SRRCa, -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═Y1)ORRCc, -(LCy)0-1-OC(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-C(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═O)RRCb, -(LCy)0-1-C(═O)ORRCa, -(LCy)0-1-OC(═O)RRCa, -(LCy)0-1-P(═O)(ORRCa)(ORRCb), -(LCy)0-1-S(O)1-2RRCc, -(LCy)0-1-S(O)12N(RRCa)(RRCb), (LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)S(O)1-2N(RRCa)(RRCb) and -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)S(O)1-2(RRCc), wherein LCy is selected from the group consisting of C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 heteroalkylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene, C2-4 alkenylene, and C2-4 alkynylene; wherein RRCa and RRCb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3-8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl; RRCc is selected from the group consisting of C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3 to 8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, and wherein RCy is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with from 1 to 5 RRCy substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, either A or Cy is a polycyclic carbocycle or polycyclic heterocycle.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, either A or Cy is a bridged bicyclic carbocycle or bridged bicyclic heterocycle.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, either A or Cy is a C-linked carbocycle or C-linked heterocycle.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, X1 is N.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, X1 is C—R4.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, X2 is N.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, X2 is C(H).
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, —CN, -(L2)0-1-C3-8 cycloalkyl, -(L2)0-1-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 alkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 haloalkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 heteroalkyl, -(L2)0-1-6-10 membered aryl and -(L2)0-1-5-10 membered heteroaryl, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, —(O)—C3-8 cycloalkyl, —(O)-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, —(O)—C1-6 alkyl and —(O)—C1-6 haloalkyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R4 is selected from the group consisting of methoxy, monofluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, isobutoxy, tert-butoxy, cyclopropoxy, cyclobutoxy, cyclopentoxy, methyl, monofluoromethyl difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl and cyclopentyl.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R4 is selected from the group consisting of (L2)0-1-phenyl, -(L2)0-1-pyridyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrimidinyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrazinyl, -(L2)0-1-pyridazinyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrrolyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrazolyl, -(L2)0-1-imidazolyl, -(L2)0-1-thienyl, -(L2)0-1-thiazolyl and -(L2)0-1-thiadiazolyl, -(L2)0-1-triazoloyl, -(L2)0-1-oxazolyl, -(L2)0-1-oxadiazolyl, -(L2)0-1-furanyl and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R4 is selected from the group consisting of -(L2)0-1-phenyl and -(L2)0-1-pyridinyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R4 is —OC(H)(CH3)-phenyl wherein said phenyl ring is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R1, R2 and R3 are each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, CN, hydrogen, C1-4 alkyl and C1-4 haloalkyl.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, R1, R2 and R3 are each hydrogen.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A and Cy are independently selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-furo[3,2-c]pyrrole, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, cyclopropane, cyclopentane, 2-Thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, tetrahydro-2H-pyran, 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane and 3-oxa-8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-furo[3,2-c]pyrrole and 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is selected from the group consisting of 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is selected from the group consisting of (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, isopropyl,
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00003
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, Cy is selected from the group consisting of 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, 2-Thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, tetrahydro-2H-pyran, 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 3-oxa-8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, Cy is selected from the group consisting of azetidine, (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, Cy is a 3-12 membered carbocycle or a C-linked 3-12 membered heterocycle and X2 is C(H).
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, Cy is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00004
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is C1-6 alkyl or C1-6 dialkylamino, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is methyl or ethyl.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, Cy is C1-6 alkyl, and is optionally substituted.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LA)0-1-C6 aryl, wherein LA is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)—, —C(O)CH2—, —OCH2—, —CH2O—, —CH2—, —CH2CH2—, —CH2OCH2—, —N(H)CH2—, —N(C1-3 alkyl)CH2—, CH2N(H)—, —CH2N(C1-3 alkyl)-; wherein said 3-8 membered cycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of propane, butane, pentane and hexane; wherein said 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of oxetane, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, oxepane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine and azepane; wherein said 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl is selected from the group consisting of pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, thiophene, thiazole, oxazole, trizole, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, pyridazine; wherein said C6 aryl is phenyl; and where in RA is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RRA substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, Cy is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LCy)0-1-C6 aryl, wherein LCy is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)—, —C(O)CH2—, —OCH2—, —CH2O—, —CH2—, —CH2CH2—, —CH2OCH2—, —N(H)CH2—, —N(C1-3 alkyl)CH2—, CH2N(H)—, —CH2N(C1-3 alkyl)-; wherein said 3-8 membered cycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of propane, butane, pentane and hexane; wherein said 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of oxetane, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, oxepane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine and azepane; wherein said 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl is selected from the group consisting of pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, thiophene, thiazole, oxazole, trizole, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, pyridazine; wherein said C6 aryl is phenyl; and where in RCy is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RRCy substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, Cy is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, OH, 2,3-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 4-fluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3-fluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3-fluoro-4-methyl-phen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 2,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, oxetane, oxetan-3-yl, thiazole, thiazol-2-yl, —CH3CH2C(═O)—, CH3C(═O)—, CF3CH2—, (HO)C(CH3)2CH2—, CH3OCH2CH2—, CH3OC(CH3)2C(═O)—, CH3OCH2C(═O)—, isopropyl, ethyl and methyl.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, A is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, CH3O—, CH3, cyclopropylmethyl, CF3 and butyl.
  • one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00005
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00006
  • In one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00007
  • one embodiment of Formula I or as a sub-embodiment of any other embodiment of Formula I, said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00008
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00009
  • wherein RCy if present replaces a hydrogen atom attached to a carbon or nitrogen atom of the Cy ring.
  • In one embodiment of Formula I the compound is selected from the group as set forth in Table 1.
  • In another aspect, the present invention provides for compositions comprising a compound of Formula I as defined above, or any embodiment thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • In another aspect, the present invention provides for a method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system (CNS) neuron or a portion thereof, the method comprising administering to the CNS neuron a compound of formula I. In certain embodiments, said administering to the CNS neuron is performed in vitro. In other embodiments, said the method further comprises grafting or implanting the CNS neuron into a human patient after administration of the agent. In other embodiment, said CNS neuron is present in a human patient. In other embodiments, said administering to the CNS neuron comprises administration of said compound of formula I in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient. In another embodiment said administering to the CNS neuron is carried out by an administration route selected from the group consisting of parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intralesional, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial interstitial infusion and implanted delivery device. In another embodiment, said method further comprising administering one or more additional pharmaceutical agents. In another embodiment, said administering of a compound of formula I results in a decrease in JNK phosphorylation, JNK activity and/or JNK expression. In another embodiment, said the administering of a compound of formula I results in a decrease of cJun phosphorylation, cJun activity, and/or cJun expression. In another embodiment, said the administering of a compound of formula I results in a decrease in p38 phosphorylation, p38 activity, and/or p38 expression.
  • In another aspect, the present invention provides for a method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system (CNS) neuron in a patient having or at risk of developing a neurodegenerative disease or condition comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In another aspect, the present invention provides for a method for decreasing or preventing one or more symptoms of a neurodegenerative disease or condition in a patient suffering therefrom comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In another aspect, the present invention provides for a method for decreasing the progression of a neurodegenerative disease or condition in a patient suffering therefrom comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In certain embodiments, said neurodegenerative disease of condition is selected from the group consisting of: Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), ischemia, stroke, intracranial hemorrhage, cerebral hemorrhage, trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes, cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies, prophyria, multiple system atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia, demyelinating diseases, Guillain-Barre syndrome, multiple sclerosis, Charcot-Marie_Tooth disease, prion disease, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Gerstmann-Striussler-Scheinker syndrome (GSS), fatal familial insomnia (FFI), bovine spongiform encephalopathy, Pick's disease, epilepsy, AIDS demential complex, nerve damage caused by exposure to toxic compounds selected from the group consisting of heavy metals, industrial solvents, drugs and chemotherapeutic agents; injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical or chemical trauma, glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropthy and optic neuritis. In certain embodiment, said neurodegenerative disease of condition in a patient is selected from the group consisting of: Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, and amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), In certain embodiment, said the compound of formula I is administered in combination with one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION A. Definitions
  • As used herein, the term “alkyl”, by itself or as part of another substituent, means, unless otherwise stated, a straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical, having the number of carbon atoms designated (i.e., C1-8 means one to eight carbons). Examples of alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, t-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, and the like. The term “alkenyl” refers to an unsaturated alkyl radical having one or more double bonds. Similarly, the term “alkynyl” refers to an unsaturated alkyl radical having one or more triple bonds. Examples of such unsaturated alkyl groups include linear and branched groups including vinyl, 2-propenyl, crotyl, 2-isopentenyl, 2-(butadienyl), 2,4-pentadienyl, 3-(1,4-pentadienyl), ethynyl, 1- and 3-propynyl, 3-butynyl, and the higher homologs and isomers. The term “cycloalkyl,” “carbocyclic,” or “carbocycle” refers to hydrocarbon ring system having specified overall number of ring atoms (e.g., 3 to 12 ring atoms in a 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl or C3-12 cycloalkyl) and being fully saturated or having no more than one double bond between ring vertices for a 3-5 membered cycloalkyl and being saturated or having no more than two double bonds between ring vertices for 6 or larger membered cycloalkyl. The monocyclic or polycyclic ring may be optionally substituted with one or more oxo groups. As used herein, “cycloalkyl,” “carbocyclic,” or “carbocycle” is also meant to refer to polycyclic (including fused and bridged bicyclic, fused and bridged polyclic and spirocyclic) hydrocarbon ring system such as, for example, bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, pinane, bicyclo[2.2.2]octane, adamantane, norborene, spirocyclic C5-12 alkane, etc. As used herein, the terms, “alkenyl,” “alkynyl,” “cycloalkyl,”, “carbocycle,” and “carbocyclic,” are meant to include mono and polyhalogenated variants thereof.
  • The term “heteroalkyl,” by itself or in combination with another term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight or branched chain hydrocarbon radical, consisting of the stated number of carbon atoms and from one to three heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, N, Si and S, and wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms can optionally be oxidized and the nitrogen heteroatom can optionally be quaternized. The heteroatom(s) O, N and S can be placed at any interior position of the heteroalkyl group. The heteroatom Si can be placed at any position of the heteroalkyl group, including the position at which the alkyl group is attached to the remainder of the molecule. A “heteroalkyl” can contain up to three units of unsaturation, and also include mono- and poly-halogenated variants, or combinations thereof. Examples include —CH2—CH2—O—CH3, —CH2—CH2—O—CF3, —CH2—CH2—NH—CH3, —CH2—CH2—N(CH3)—CH3, —CH2—S—CH2—CH3, —S(O)—CH3, —CH2—CH2—S(O)2—CH3, —CH═CH—O—CH3, —Si(CH3)3, —CH2—CH═N—OCH3, and —CH═CH═N(CH3)—CH3. Up to two heteroatoms can be consecutive, such as, for example, —CH2—NH—OCH3 and —CH2—O—Si(CH3)3.
  • The term “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” refers to a saturated or partially unsaturated ring system radical having from the indicated number of overall number of stated ring atoms and containing from one to five heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized, as ring atoms (e.g., a 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl that would have 3 to 12 ring atoms and include at least one heteroatom, which also could be referred to as a C2-11 heterocycloalkyl). Unless otherwise stated, a “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” ring system can be a monocyclic or a fused, bridged, or spirocyclic polycyclic (including a fused bicyclic, bridged bicyclic or spirocyclic) ring system. The monocyclic or polycyclic ring may be optionally substituted with one or more oxo groups. A “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through one or more ring carbons or heteroatoms. Non limiting examples of “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” rings include pyrrolidine, piperidine, N-methylpiperidine, imidazolidine, pyrazolidine, butyrolactam, valerolactam, imidazolidinone, hydantoin, dioxolane, phthalimide, piperidine, pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione, 1,4-dioxane, morpholine, thiomorpholine, thiomorpholine-S-oxide, thiomorpholine-S,S-oxide, piperazine, pyran, pyridone, 3-pyrroline, thiopyran, pyrone, tetrahydrofuran, tetrhydrothiophene, quinuclidine, tropane, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, (1s,4s)-2-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane and the like. A “heterocycloalkyl,” “heterocyclic,” or “heterocycle” can include mono- and poly-halogenated variants thereof.
  • The term “alkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical derived from an alkane, as exemplified by —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, and can be branched. Typically, an alkyl (or alkylene) group will have from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, with those groups having 10 or fewer carbon atoms being preferred in the present invention. “Alkenylene” and “alkynylene” refer to the unsaturated forms of “alkylene” having double or triple bonds, respectively. “Alkylene”, “alkenylene” and “alkynylene” are also meant to include mono and poly-halogenated variants.
  • The term “heteroalkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical, saturated or unsaturated or polyunsaturated, derived from heteroalkyl, as exemplified by —CH2—CH2—S—CH2CH2— and —CH2—S—CH2—CH2—NH—CH2—, —CH2—CH═C(H)CH2—O—CH2— and —S—CH2—C≡C—. The term “heteroalkylene” is also meant to include mono and poly-halogenated variants.
  • The term “alkoxylene” and “aminoalkylene” and “thioalkylene” by itself or as part of another substituent means a divalent radical, saturated or unsaturated or polyunsaturated, derived from alkoxy, alkylamino and alkylthio, respectively, as exemplified by —OCH2CH2—, —O—CH2—CH═CH—, —N(H)CH2C(H)(CH3)CH2— and —S—CH2—C≡C—. The term “alkoxylene” and “aminoalkylene” and “thioalkylene” are meant to include mono and poly halogenated variants
  • The terms “alkoxy,” “alkylamino” and “alkylthio”, are used in their conventional sense, and refer to those alkyl groups attached to the remainder of the molecule via an oxygen atom (“oxy”), an amino group (“amino”) or thio group, and further include mono- and poly-halogenated variants thereof. Additionally, for dialkylamino groups, the alkyl portions can be the same or different.
  • The terms “halo” or “halogen,” by themselves or as part of another substituent, mean, unless otherwise stated, a fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine atom. Additionally, terms such as “haloalkyl,” are meant to include monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl. For example, the term “C1-4 haloalkyl” is mean to include trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 4-chlorobutyl, 3-bromopropyl, difluoromethyl, and the like. The term “(halo)alkyl” as used herein includes optionally halogenated alkyl. Thus the term “(halo)alkyl” includes both alkyl and haloalkyl (e.g., monohaloalkyl and polyhaloalkyl).
  • The term “aryl” means, unless otherwise stated, a polyunsaturated, typically aromatic, hydrocarbon ring, which can be a single ring or multiple rings (up to three rings) which are fused together. The term “heteroaryl” refers to aryl ring(s) that contain from one to five heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, wherein the nitrogen and sulfur atoms are optionally oxidized, and the nitrogen atom(s) are optionally quaternized. A heteroaryl group can be attached to the remainder of the molecule through a heteroatom. Non-limiting examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and biphenyl, while non-limiting examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimindinyl, triazinyl, quinolinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalaziniyl, benzotriazinyl, purinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyrazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, isobenzofuryl, isoindolyl, indolizinyl, benzotriazinyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl, imidazopyridines, benzothiaxolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, indolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrazolyl, indazolyl, pteridinyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, furyl, thienyl and the like. Optional substituents for each of the above noted aryl and heteroaryl ring systems can be selected from the group of acceptable substituents described further below.
  • The above terms (e.g., “alkyl,” “aryl” and “heteroaryl”), in some embodiments, will include both substituted and unsubstituted forms of the indicated radical. Preferred substituents for each type of radical are provided below.
  • Substituents for the alkyl radicals (including those groups often referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl and cycloalkyl) can be a variety of groups including, but not limited to, -halogen, ═O, —OR′, —NR′R″, —SR′, —SiR′R″R′″, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)R′, —CO2R′, —CONR′R″, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR′″C(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)2R′, —NHC(NH2)═NH, —NR′C(NH2)═NH, —NHC(NH2)═NR′, —NR′″C(NR′R″)═N—CN, —NR′″C(NR′R″)═NOR′, —NHC(NH2)═NR′,—S(O)R′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)2NR′R″,—NR'S(O)2R″, —NR′″S(O)2NR′R″, —CN, —NO2, —(CH2)1-4—OR′, —(CH2)1-4—NR′R″, —(CH2)1-4—SR′, —(CH2)1-4—SiR′R “R′”, —(CH2)1-4—OC(O)R′, —(CH2)1-4—C(O)R′, —(CH2)1-4—CO2R′, —(CH2)14CONR′R″, in a number ranging from zero to (2m′+1), where m′ is the total number of carbon atoms in such radical. R′, R″ and R′″each independently refer groups including, for example, hydrogen, unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, unsubstituted heteroalkyl, unsubstituted aryl, aryl substituted with 1-3 halogens, unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy or C1-6 thioalkoxy groups, or unsubstituted aryl-C1-4 alkyl groups, unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, among others. When R′ and R″ are attached to the same nitrogen atom, they can be combined with the nitrogen atom to form a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, or 7-membered ring. For example, —NR′R″ is meant to include 1-pyrrolidinyl and 4-morpholinyl. Other substitutents for alkyl radicals, including heteroalkyl, alkylene, include for example, ═O, ═NR′, ═N—OR′, ═N—CN, ═NH, wherein R′ include substituents as described above. When a substituent for the alkyl radicals (including those groups often referred to as alkylene, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl and cycloalkyl) contains an alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene linker (e.g., —(CH2)1-4—NR′R″ for alkylene), the alkylene linker includes halo variants as well. For example, the linker “—(CH2)1-4—” when used as part of a substituent is meant to include difluoromethylene, 1,2-difluoroethylene, etc.
  • Similarly, substituents for the aryl and heteroaryl groups are varied and are generally selected from the group including, but not limited to, -halogen, —OR′, —OC(O)R′, —NR′R″, —SR′, —R′, —CN, —NO2, —CO2R′, —CONR′R″, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)NR′R″, —NR″C(O)R′, —NR″C(O)2R′, —NR′C(O)NR″R′″, —NHC(NH2)═NH, —NR′C(NH2)═NH, —NHC(NH2)═NR′, —S(O)R′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)2NR′R″,—NR'S(O)2R″, —N3, perfluoro-C1-4 alkoxy, and perfluoro-C1-4 alkyl, —(CH2)1-4—OR′, —(CH2)1-4—NR′R″, —(CH2)1-4—SR′, —(CH2)1-4—SiR′R″R′″, —(CH2)1-4—OC(O)R′, —(CH2)1-4—C(O)R′, —(CH2)1-4—CO2R′, —(CH2)1-4CONR′R″, in a number ranging from zero to the total number of open valences on the aromatic ring system; and where R′, R″ and R′″ are independently selected from hydrogen, C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, unsubstituted aryl and heteroaryl, (unsubstituted aryl)-C1-4 alkyl, and unsubstituted aryloxy-C1-4 alkyl. Other suitable substituents include each of the above aryl substituents attached to a ring atom by an alkylene tether of from 1-4 carbon atoms. When a substituent for the aryl or heteroaryl group contains an alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene linker (e.g., —(CH2)1-4—NR′R″ for alkylene), the alkylene linker includes halo variants as well. For example, the linker “—(CH2)1-4—” when used as part of a substituent is meant to include difluoromethylene, 1,2-difluoroethylene, etc.
  • As used herein, the term “heteroatom” is meant to include oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S) and silicon (Si).
  • As used herein, the term “C-linked” means that the group that the term describes is attached the remainder of the molecule through a ring carbon atom.
  • As used herein, the term “N-linked” means that the group that the term describes is attached to the remainder of the molecule through a ring nitrogen atom.
  • As used herein, the term “chiral” refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.
  • As used herein, the term “stereoisomers” refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.
  • As used herein a wavy line “
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-P00001
    ” that intersects a bond in a chemical structure fragment indicates the point of attachment of the bond to which the wavy bond intersects in the chemical structure fragment to the remainder of a molecule or structural formula.
  • As used herein, the representation of a group (e.g., Xd) in parenthesis followed by a subscript integer range (e.g., (Xd)0-2) means that the group can have the number of occurrences as designated by the integer range. For example, (Xd)0-1 means the group Xd can be absent or can occur one time.
  • “Diastereomer” refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g. melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers can separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.
  • “Enantiomers” refer to two stereoisomers of a compound which are non-superimposable mirror images of one another.
  • Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms (1984) McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York; and Eliel, E. and Wilen, S., “Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1994. The compounds of the invention can contain asymmetric or chiral centers, and therefore exist in different stereoisomeric forms. It is intended that all stereoisomeric forms of the compounds of the invention, including but not limited to, diastereomers, enantiomers and atropisomers, as well as mixtures thereof such as racemic mixtures, form part of the present invention. Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L, or R and S, are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and 1 or (+) and (−) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (−) or 1 meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these stereoisomers are identical except that they are mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer can also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which can occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process. The terms “racemic mixture” and “racemate” refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.
  • As used herein, the term “tautomer” or “tautomeric form” refers to structural isomers of different energies which are interconvertible via a low energy barrier. For example, proton tautomers (also known as prototropic tautomers) include interconversions via migration of a proton, such as keto-enol and imine-enamine isomerizations. Valence tautomers include interconversions by reorganization of some of the bonding electrons.
  • As used herein, the term “solvate” refers to an association or complex of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of the invention. Examples of solvents that form solvates include, but are not limited to, water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, and ethanolamine. The term “hydrate” refers to the complex where the solvent molecule is water.
  • As used herein, the term “protecting group” refers to a substituent that is commonly employed to block or protect a particular functional group on a compound. For example, an “amino-protecting group” is a substituent attached to an amino group that blocks or protects the amino functionality in the compound. Suitable amino-protecting groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ) and 9-fluorenylmethylenoxycarbonyl (Fmoc). Similarly, a “hydroxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of a hydroxy group that blocks or protects the hydroxy functionality. Suitable protecting groups include acetyl and silyl. A “carboxy-protecting group” refers to a substituent of the carboxy group that blocks or protects the carboxy functionality. Common carboxy-protecting groups include phenylsulfonylethyl, cyanoethyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl, 2-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethyl, 2-(p-nitrophenylsulfenyl)ethyl, 2-(diphenylphosphino)-ethyl, nitroethyl and the like. For a general description of protecting groups and their use, see P.G.M. Wuts and T.W. Greene, Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis 4th edition, Wiley-Interscience, New York, 2006.
  • As used herein, the term “mammal” includes, but is not limited to, humans, mice, rats, guinea pigs, monkeys, dogs, cats, horses, cows, pigs, and sheep.
  • As used herein, the term “salts” is meant to include salts of the active compounds which are prepared with relatively nontoxic acids or bases (e.g., those salts that are pharmaceutically acceptable), depending on the particular substituents found on the compounds described herein. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively acidic functionalities, base addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired base, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable inorganic bases include aluminum, ammonium, calcium, copper, ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic, manganous, potassium, sodium, zinc and the like. Salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable organic bases include salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, including substituted amines, cyclic amines, naturally-occurring amines and the like, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine and the like. When compounds of the present invention contain relatively basic functionalities, acid addition salts can be obtained by contacting the neutral form of such compounds with a sufficient amount of the desired acid, either neat or in a suitable inert solvent. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts include those derived from inorganic acids like hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, carbonic, monohydrogencarbonic, phosphoric, monohydrogenphosphoric, dihydrogenphosphoric, sulfuric, monohydrogensulfuric, hydriodic, or phosphorous acids and the like, as well as the salts derived from relatively nontoxic organic acids like acetic, propionic, isobutyric, malonic, benzoic, succinic, suberic, fumaric, mandelic, phthalic, benzenesulfonic, p-tolylsulfonic, citric, tartaric, methanesulfonic, and the like. Also included are salts of amino acids such as arginate and the like, and salts of organic acids like glucuronic or galactunoric acids and the like (see, for example, Berge, S. M., et al., “Pharmaceutical Salts”, Journal of Pharmaceutical Science, 1977, 66, 1-19). Certain specific compounds of the present invention contain both basic and acidic functionalities that allow the compounds to be converted into either base or acid addition salts.
  • The neutral forms of the compounds can be regenerated by contacting the salt with a base or acid and isolating the parent compound in the conventional manner. The parent form of the compound differs from the various salt forms in certain physical properties, such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the salts are equivalent to the parent form of the compound for the purposes of the present invention.
  • In addition to salt forms, the present invention provides compounds which are in a prodrug form. As used herein the term “prodrug” refers to those compounds that readily undergo chemical changes under physiological conditions to provide the compounds of the present invention. Additionally, prodrugs can be converted to the compounds of the present invention by chemical or biochemical methods in an ex vivo environment. For example, prodrugs can be slowly converted to the compounds of the present invention when placed in a transdermal patch reservoir with a suitable enzyme or chemical reagent.
  • Prodrugs of the invention include compounds wherein an amino acid residue, or a polypeptide chain of two or more (e.g., two, three or four) amino acid residues, is covalently joined through an amide or ester bond to a free amino, hydroxy or carboxylic acid group of a compound of the present invention. The amino acid residues include but are not limited to the 20 naturally occurring amino acids commonly designated by three letter symbols and also includes phosphoserine, phosphothreonine, phosphotyrosine, 4-hydroxyproline, hydroxylysine, demosine, isodemosine, gamma-carboxyglutamate, hippuric acid, octahydroindole-2-carboxylic acid, statine, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid, penicillamine, ornithine, 3-methylhistidine, norvaline, beta-alanine, gamma-aminobutyric acid, citrulline, homocysteine, homoserine, methyl-alanine, para-benzoylphenylalanine, phenylglycine, propargylglycine, sarcosine, methionine sulfone and tert-butylglycine.
  • Additional types of prodrugs are also encompassed. For instance, a free carboxyl group of a compound of the invention can be derivatized as an amide or alkyl ester. As another example, compounds of this invention comprising free hydroxy groups can be derivatized as prodrugs by converting the hydroxy group into a group such as, but not limited to, a phosphate ester, hemisuccinate, dimethylaminoacetate, or phosphoryloxymethyloxycarbonyl group, as outlined in Fleisher, D. et al., (1996) Improved oral drug delivery: solubility limitations overcome by the use of prodrugs Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 19:115. Carbamate prodrugs of hydroxy and amino groups are also included, as are carbonate prodrugs, sulfonate esters and sulfate esters of hydroxy groups. Derivatization of hydroxy groups as (acyloxy)methyl and (acyloxy)ethyl ethers, wherein the acyl group can be an alkyl ester optionally substituted with groups including, but not limited to, ether, amine and carboxylic acid functionalities, or where the acyl group is an amino acid ester as described above, are also encompassed. Prodrugs of this type are described in J. Med. Chem., (1996), 39:10. More specific examples include replacement of the hydrogen atom of the alcohol group with a group such as (C1-6)alkanoyloxymethyl, 1-((C1-6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, 1-methyl-1-((C1-6)alkanoyloxy)ethyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyloxymethyl, N—(C1-6)alkoxycarbonylaminomethyl, succinoyl, (C1-6)alkanoyl, alpha-amino(C1-4)alkanoyl, arylacyl and alpha-aminoacyl, or alpha-aminoacyl-alpha-aminoacyl, where each alpha-aminoacyl group is independently selected from the naturally occurring L-amino acids, P(O)(OH)2, —P(O)(O(C1-6)alkyl)2 or glycosyl (the radical resulting from the removal of a hydroxyl group of the hemiacetal form of a carbohydrate).
  • For additional examples of prodrug derivatives, see, for example, a) Design of Prodrugs, edited by H. Bundgaard, (Elsevier, 1985) and Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 42, p. 309-396, edited by K. Widder, et al. (Academic Press, 1985); b) A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, edited by Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Chapter 5 “Design and Application of Prodrugs,” by H. Bundgaard p. 113-191 (1991); c) H. Bundgaard, Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, 8:1-38 (1992); d) H. Bundgaard, et al., Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences, 77:285 (1988); and e) N. Kakeya, et al., Chem. Pharm. Bull., 32:692 (1984), each of which is specifically incorporated herein by reference.
  • Additionally, the present invention provides for metabolites of compounds of the invention. As used herein, a “metabolite” refers to a product produced through metabolism in the body of a specified compound or salt thereof. Such products can result for example from the oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, amidation, deamidation, esterification, deesterification, enzymatic cleavage, and the like, of the administered compound.
  • Metabolite products typically are identified by preparing a radiolabelled (e.g., 14C or 3H) isotope of a compound of the invention, administering it parenterally in a detectable dose (e.g., greater than about 0.5 mg/kg) to an animal such as rat, mouse, guinea pig, monkey, or to man, allowing sufficient time for metabolism to occur (typically about 30 seconds to 30 hours) and isolating its conversion products from the urine, blood or other biological samples. These products are easily isolated since they are labeled (others are isolated by the use of antibodies capable of binding epitopes surviving in the metabolite). The metabolite structures are determined in conventional fashion, e.g., by MS, LC/MS or NMR analysis. In general, analysis of metabolites is done in the same way as conventional drug metabolism studies well known to those skilled in the art. The metabolite products, so long as they are not otherwise found in vivo, are useful in diagnostic assays for therapeutic dosing of the compounds of the invention.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in unsolvated forms as well as solvated forms, including hydrated forms. In general, the solvated forms are equivalent to unsolvated forms and are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention. Certain compounds of the present invention can exist in multiple crystalline or amorphous forms. In general, all physical forms are equivalent for the uses contemplated by the present invention and are intended to be within the scope of the present invention.
  • Certain compounds of the present invention possess asymmetric carbon atoms (optical centers) or double bonds; the racemates, diastereomers, geometric isomers, regioisomers and individual isomers (e.g., separate enantiomers) are all intended to be encompassed within the scope of the present invention.
  • The compounds of the present invention can also contain unnatural proportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compounds. For example, the present invention also embraces isotopically-labeled variants of the present invention which are identical to those recited herein, bur the for the fact that one or more atoms are replace by an atom having the atomic mass or mass number different from the predominant atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature for the atom. All isotopes of any particular atom or element as specified are contemplated within the scope of the compounds of the invention, and their uses. Exemplary isotopes that can be incorporated in to compounds of the invention include istopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, sulfur, fluorine, chlorine and iodine, such as 2H (“D”), 3H, 11C, 13C, 14C, 13N, 15N, 15O, 17O, 132P, 33P, 35S, 18F, 36Cl, 123I and 125I. Certain isotopically labeled compounds of the present invention (e.g., those labeled with 3H or 14C) are useful in compound and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. Tritiated (3H) and carbon-14 (14C) isotopes are usefule for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further substituteion with heavier isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) may afford certain therapeutic advantages resuting from greater metabolic stability (e.g., increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements) and hence may be preferred in some circumstances. Positron emitting isotopes such as 15O, 13N, 11C, and 18F are useful for positron emission tomography (PET) studies to examine substrate receptor occupancy. Isotopically labeled compounds of the present inventions can generally be prepared by following procedures analogous to those disclosed in the Schemes and/or in the Examples herein below, by substituting an isotopically labeled reagent for a non-isotopically labeled reagent.
  • The terms “treat” and “treatment” refer to both therapeutic treatment and/or prophylactic treatment or preventative measures, wherein the object is to prevent or slow down (lessen) an undesired physiological change or disorder, such as, for example, the development or spread of cancer. For purposes of this invention, beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, alleviation of symptoms, diminishment of extent of disease or disorder, stabilized (i.e., not worsening) state of disease or disorder, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state or disorder, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable. “Treatment” can also mean prolonging survival as compared to expected survival if not receiving treatment. Those in need of treatment include those already with the disease or disorder as well as those prone to have the disease or disorder or those in which the disease or disorder is to be prevented.
  • The phrase “therapeutically effective amount” means an amount of a compound of the present invention that (i) treats or prevents the particular disease, condition, or disorder, (ii) attenuates, ameliorates, or eliminates one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder, or (iii) prevents or delays the onset of one or more symptoms of the particular disease, condition, or disorder described herein. In some embodiments, a therapeutically effective amount is an amount of a chemical entity described herein sufficient to significantly decrease or delay neuronal cell death.
  • The term “administering” as used herein refers to contacting a neuron or portion therof with a compound described herein. This includes administration of the compound to a subject (e.g., a patient, mammal) in which the neuron or portion therof is present, as well as introducing the inhibitor into a medium in which a neuro or portion thereof is cultured.
  • The term “patient” as used herein refers to any mammal, including humans, higher non-human primates, rodenst domestic and farm animals such as cow, horses, dogs and cats. In one embodiment, the patient is a human patient.
  • The term “bioavailability” refers to the systemic availability (i.e., blood/plasma levels) of a given amount of drug administered to a patient. Bioavailability is an absolute term that indicates measurement of both the time (rate) and total amount (extent) of drug that reaches the general circulation from an administered dosage form.
  • The phrases “preventing axon degeneration,” “preventing neuron degeneration,” “preventing CNS neuron degeneration,” “inhibiting axon degeneration,” “inhibiting neuron degeneration” “inhibiting CNS neuron degeneration” as used herein include (i) the ability to inhibit or presenve axon or neuron degeration in patients diagnosed as having a neurodegerative disease or risk of developing a neurodegenerative disease and (ii) the ability to inhibit or prevent further axon or neuron degeneration in patients who are already suffering from, or have symptoms of a neurodegenerative disease. Preventing axon or neuron degeneration includes decreasing or inhbiting axon or neuron degeneration, which may be characterized by complete or partial inhibition or neuron or axon degeneration. This can be assessed, for example, by analysis of neurological function. The above-listed terms also include in vitro and ex vivo methods. Further, the pharases “preventing neuron degeneration” and “inhibiting neuron degeneration” in clued such inhibiton with respect to the entire neuron or a portion thereof, such as the neuron ell body, axons and dendrites. The administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or even 100% decrease in one or more symptoms of a disorder of the nervous system, a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an inusry to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical or chemical trauma, pain; and ocular related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder (e.g., tremors, slowness of movement, ataxia, loss of balance, depressioin, decreased cognitive function, short term memory loss, long term memory loss, confusion, changes in personality, language difficultities, loss of sensory perception, sensitivity to touch, numbness in extremities, muscle weakness, muscle paralysis, muscle cramps, muscle spasms, significant changes in eating habits, excessive fear or worry, insomnia, delusions, hallucinations, fatigue, back pain, chest pain, digestive problems, headache, rapid heart rate, dizziness, blurred vision, shadows or missing areas of vision, metamorphopsia, impairment in color vision, decreased recovery of visual function after exposure to bright light, and loss in visual contrast sensitivity) in a subject or population compared to a control subject or population that does not receive the one or more agent described herein. The administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in a neuron population or in a subject compared to the number of neurons (or neuron bodies, axons, or dendrites thereof) that degenerate in neuron population or in a subject that is not administered the one or more of the agents described herein. The administration of one or more agent as described herein may result in at least a 10% decrease (e.g., at least 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even 100% decrease) in the likelihood of developing a disorder of the nervous system; a condition of the nervous system that is secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system; an injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, pain; an ocular-related neurodegeneration; memory loss; or a psychiatric disorder in a subject or a subject population compared to a control subject or population not treated with the one or more compounds described herein.
  • The term “neuron” as used herein denotes nervous system cells that include a central cell body or soma, and two types of extensions or projections: dendrites, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed to the cell body, and axons, by which, in general, the majority of neuronal signals are conveyed from the cell body to effector cells, such as target neurons or muscle. Neurons can convey information from tissues and organs into the central nervous system (afferent or sensory neurons) and transmit signals from the central nervous systems to effector cells (efferent or motor neurons). Other neurons, designated interneurons, connect neurons within the central nervous system (the brain and spinal column). Certain specific examples of neuron types that may be subject to treatment according to the invention include cerebellar granule neurons, dorsal root ganglion neurons, and cortical neurons.
    • B. Compounds
  • In one aspect the present invention provides for novel compounds. In a first embodiment of such compounds (Embodiment 1; abbreviated as “E1”) the invention provides for compounds of Formula I (I):
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00010
    • or salts thereof wherein
    • R1, R2 and R3 are each independently H, F, Cl, Br, I, C1-6 alkyl or C1-6 haloalkyl;
    • X1 is N or C—R4, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, —Br, I -(L1)0-1-C1-6 alkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 haloalkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 heteroalkyl, -(L2)0-1-C3-8 cycloalkyl, -(L2)0-1-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L2)0-1-6-10 membered aryl, -(L2)0-1-5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein L1 is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —N(H)—, —S—, —N(C1-6 alkyl)-, ═O, and L2 is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —N(H)—, —N(C1-6 alkyl)-, —S—, ═O, C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 alkenylene, C1-4 alkynylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene and C1-4 heteroalkylene, and wherein R4 is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with RR4 substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, 3-5 membered cycloalkyl, 3-5 membered heterocycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, C1-6 alkylamino, C1-6 dialkylamino, C1-6 alkylthio, ═O, —NH2, —CN, —NO2 and —SF5;
    • X2 is N or CH;
    • A is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 dialkylamino, 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein A is optionally substituted with 1-5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LA)01-C6 aryl, -(LA)0-1-NRR1aRR1b, -(LA)0-1-ORR1a, -(LA)0-1-SRR1a, -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═Y1)ORR1c, -(LA)0-1-OC(═O)N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)01-N(RR1a)C(═O)N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-C(═O)N(RR1a(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═O)RR1b, -(LA)0-1-C(═O)ORR1a, -(LA)0-1-OC(═O)RR1a, (LA)0-1-P(═O)(ORR1a)(ORR1b), (LA)0-1-S(O)12RR1c, -(LA)0-1-S(O)12N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)S(O)1-2N(RR1a)(RR1b) and -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)S(O)1-2(RR1c), wherein LA is selected from the group consisting of C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 heteroalkylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene, C2-4 alkenylene, and C2-4 alkynylene; wherein RR1a and RR1b are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3-8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl; RR1c is selected from the group consisting of C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3 to 8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, and wherein RA is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with RRA substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino; and
    • Cy is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein Cy is optionally substituted on carbon or heteroatoms with RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LCy)0-1-phenyl, -(LCy)0-1-NRRCaRRCb, -(LCy)0-1-ORRCa, -(LCy)0-1-SRRCa, -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═Y 1)ORRCc, -(LCy)0-1-OC(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-C(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), (LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═O)RRCb, -(LCy)0-1-C(═O)ORRCa, -(LCy)0-1-OC(═O)RRCa, -(LCy)0-1-P(═O)(ORRCa)(ORRCb), -(LCy)0-1-S(O)1-2RRCc, -(LCy)0-1-S(O)12N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)S(O)1-2N(RRCa)(RRCb) and -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)S(O)1-2(RRCc), wherein LCy is selected from the group consisting of C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 heteroalkylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene, C2-4 alkenylene, and C2-4 alkynylene; wherein RRCa and RRCb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3-8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl; RRCc is selected from the group consisting of C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3 to 8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, and wherein RCy is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with from 1 to 5 RRCy substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino.
  • Further embodiments (E) of the first embodiment of compounds of the invention, are described below
  • E2. A compound according to E1, wherein either A or Cy is a polycyclic carbocycle or polycyclic heterocycle.
    E3. A compound according to E1 or E2, wherein X1 is N.
    E4. A compound according to E1 or E2, wherein X1 is C—R4.
    E5. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3 or E4, wherein X2 is N.
    E6. A compound of claim, E1, E2, E3 or E4, wherein X2 is C(H).
    E7. A compound according to claim E1, E2, E4, E5 or E6, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, —CN, -(L2)0-1-C3-8 cycloalkyl, -(L2)0-1-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 alkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 haloalkyl, -(L1)0-1-C1-6 heteroalkyl, -(L2)0-1-6-10 membered aryl and -(L2)0-1-5-10 membered heteroaryl, and is optionally substituted.
    E8. A compound according to claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6 or E7, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of —F, —Cl, C3-8 cycloalkyl, 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, —(O)—C3-8 cycloalkyl, —(O)-3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, —(O)—C1-6 alkyl and —(O)—C1-6 haloalkyl, and is optionally substituted.
    E9. A compound of claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6, E7 or E8, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of methoxy, monofluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, isobutoxy, tert-butoxy, cyclopropoxy, cyclobutoxy, cyclopentoxy, methyl, monofluoromethyl difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl and cyclopentyl.
    E10. A compound of claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6 or E7, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of (L2)0-1-phenyl, -(L2)0-1-pyridyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrimidinyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrazinyl, -(L2)0-1-pyridazinyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrrolyl, -(L2)0-1-pyrazolyl, -(L2)0-1-imidazolyl, -(L2)0-1-thienyl, -(L2)0-1-thiazolyl and -(L2)0-1-thiadiazolyl, -(L2)0-1-triazoloyl, -(L2)0-1-oxazolyl, -(L2)0-1-oxadiazolyl, -(L2)0-1-furanyl and is optionally substituted.
    E11. A compound of claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6, E7 or E10, wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of -(L2)0-1-phenyl and -(L2)0-1-pyridinyl, and is optionally substituted.
    E12. A compound of claim E1, E2, E4, E5, E6, E7, E10 or E11, wherein R4 is —OC(H)(CH3)-phenyl wherein said phenyl ring is optionally substituted.
    E13. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11 or E12, wherein R1, R2 and R3 are each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, CN, hydrogen, C1-4 alkyl and C1-4 haloalkyl.
    E14. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12 or E13, wherein R1, R2 and R3 are each hydrogen.
    E15. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein A and Cy are independently selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-furo[3,2-c]pyrrole, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, cyclopropane, cyclopentane, 2-Thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, tetrahydro-2H-pyran, 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane and 3-oxa-8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, and is optionally substituted.
    E16. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14 or E15, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-furo[3,2-c]pyrrole and 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, and is optionally substituted.
    E17. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15 or E16, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, and is optionally substituted.
    E18. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16 or E17, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
    E19. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein is A is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, isopropyl,
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00011
  • E20. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16, E17, E18 or E19, wherein Cy is selected from the group consisting of 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, 2-Thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, tetrahydro-2H-pyran, 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 3-oxa-8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, and is optionally substituted.
    E21. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16, E17, E18, E19 or E20, wherein Cy is selected from the group consisting of azetidine, (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
    E22. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein Cy is selected from the group consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00012
  • E23. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein A is C1-6 alkyl or C1-6 dialkylamino, and is optionally substituted.
    E24. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein A is methyl or ethyl.
    E25. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13 or E14, wherein Cy is C1-6 alkyl, and is optionally substituted.
    E26. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16, E17, E18 or E23, wherein A is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LA)0-1-C6 aryl, wherein LA is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)—, —C(O)CH2—,—OCH2—, —CH2O—, —CH2—, —CH2CH2—, —CH2OCH2—, —N(H)CH2—, —N(C1-3 alkyl)CH2—, CH2N(H)—, —CH2N(C1-3 alkyl)-; wherein said 3-8 membered cycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of propane, butane, pentane and hexane; wherein said 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of oxetane, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, oxepane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine and azepane; wherein said 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl is selected from the group consisting of pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, thiophene, thiazole, oxazole, trizole, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, pyridazine; wherein said C6 aryl is phenyl; and where in RA is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RRA substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino.
    E27. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E20, E21 or E25, wherein Cy is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LCy)0-1-C6 aryl, wherein LCy is selected from the group consisting o —C(O)—, —C(O)CH2—,—OCH2—, —CH2O—, —CH2—, —CH2CH2—, —CH2OCH2—, —N(H)CH2—, —N(C1-3 alkyl)CH2—, CH2N(H)—, —CH2N(C1-3 alkyl)-; wherein said 3-8 membered cycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of propane, butane, pentane and hexane; wherein said 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl is selected from the group consisting of oxetane, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydropyran, oxepane, azetidine, pyrrolidine, piperidine and azepane; wherein said 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl is selected from the group consisting of pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, thiophene, thiazole, oxazole, trizole, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, pyridazine; wherein said C6 aryl is phenyl; and where in RCy is optionally substituted with from 1 to 5 RRCy substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)02—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino.
    E28. A compound of claim of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E20, E21, E24, E25 or E26, wherein Cy is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, OH, 2,3-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 4-fluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3-fluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3-fluoro-4-methyl-phen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 2,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, oxetane, oxetan-3-yl, thiazole, thiazol-2-yl, —CH3CH2C(═O)—, CH3C(═O)—, CF3CH2—, (HO)C(CH3)2CH2—, CH3OCH2CH2—, CH3OC(CH3)2C(═O)—, CH3OCH2C(═O)—, isopropyl, ethyl and methyl.
    E29. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16, E17, E18, E23 or E26, wherein A is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, CH3O—, CH3, cyclopropylmethyl, CF3 and butyl.
    E30. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E15, E16, E17, E18, E19, E20, E21, E22, E25, E26, E27, E28 or E29, wherein said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00013
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00014
  • E31. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E20, E21, E22, E25, E27, E28 or E29, wherein said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00015
  • E32. A compound of claim E1, E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E9, E10, E11, E12, E13, E14, E25, E16, E27, E18, E19, E20, E21, E22, E24, E26, E27, E28 or E29, wherein said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00016
  • wherein RCy if present replaces a hydrogen atom attached to a carbon or nitrogen atom of the Cy ring
    E33. A compound of claim 1 selected from the group as set forth in Table 1.
    • C. Synthesis of Compounds
  • Compounds of the invention as well as key intermediates can be prepared following the general synthetic schemes described below (Scheme 1-4). In Schemes 1-4, R1, R2, R3, R4, X1 and X2 have the meaning as described for compounds of Formula I; halo refers to a halogen atom, e.g., Cl, F, Br, I; and R where present means a cyclic or noncyclic noninterferring sustituent. More detailed description of the individual reaction steps, is found in the Examples section below. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that other synthetic routes may be used to synthesize the inventive compounds. Although specific starting materials and reagents are depicted in the Schemes and discussed below, other starting materials and reagents can be easily substituted to provide a variety of derivatives and/or reaction conditions. In addition, many of the compounds prepared by the methods described below can be further modified in light of this disclosure using conventional chemistry well known to those skilled in the art.
  • In preparing compounds of the invention, protection of remote functionality (e.g., primary or secondary amine) of intermediates may be necessary. The need for such protection will vary depending on the nature of the remote functionality and the conditions of the preparation methods. Suitable amino-protecting groups include acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBz) and 9-fluorenylmethylenoxycarbonyl (Fmoc). The need for such protection is readily determined by one skilled in the art. For a general description of protecting groups and their use, see T. W. Greene, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991.
  • As illustrated in Scheme 1, compounds or intermediates of the inventions can be prepared by displacement of a halogen atom from a dihalothiopyrimidine compound (i) with an amine group under basic conditions. Further treatment of the alkylthio compound (ii) under oxidative conditions provides the oxidized sulfone (iii) compound. A Suzuki-Miyaura coupling reaction between (iii) and a boronate reagent (iv) with a Pd(O) catalyst yields compounds and or intermediates of the invention (v) (See, Miyaura, N.; Suzuki, A. Chem. Rev. 1995, 95, 2457-2483).
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00017
  • As illustrated in Scheme 2, compounds or intermediates of the invention can be prepared by reaction of a trihalo pyrimidine (vi) with a boronate ester under Pd(O) coupling conditions to provide biheteroaryl (vii). Subsequent sequential displacement of a halogens atom of vii with an the same of different amine reagents under basic conditions, provide biheteroaryl compounds (ix).
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00018
  • As illustrated in Scheme 3, compounds or intermediates of the invention can be prepared by Suzuki-Miyaura coupling of dichloroodopyridine (x) with an amine under Pd(0) catalyzed conditions (See, Hartwig, J. F. (1997), “Palladium-Catalyzed Amination of Aryl Halides: Mechanism and Rational Catalyst Design”, Synlett 4: 329-340). Displacement of a chloro group in xi with an amine followed by Suzuki coupling of the resultant product (xii) with a boronate ester (iv-b) provides compounds and or intermediates of the invention xiii.
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00019
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00020
  • As illustrated in Scheme 4, compounds and or intermediates of the invention can be prepared by treating a R substituted dichloro compound (xiv) with an amine under base conditions to produce compound xv. Subsequent treatment of compound xv under Pd(O) catalyst coupling conditions provides compounds and or intermediates of the inventions (xvi).
    • D. Pharmaceutical Compositions and Administrations
  • In addition to one or more of the compounds provided above (or stereoisomers, geometric isomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, isotopes, (pharmaceutically acceptable) salts, or prodrugs thereof), the invention also provides for compositions and medicaments comprising a compound of Formula I or any subformula or any embodiment thereof and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient. The compositions of the invention can be used for inhibiting DLK activity in patients (e.g., humans) pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • The term “composition,” as used herein, is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. By “pharmaceutically acceptable” it is meant the carrier, diluent or excipient must be compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not deleterious to the recipient thereof.
  • In one embodiment, the invention provides for pharmaceutical compositions (or medicaments) comprising a compound of Formula I (or stereoisomers, geometric isomers, tautomers, solvates, metabolites, isotopes, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, or prodrugs thereof) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient. In another embodiment, the invention provides for preparing compositions (or medicaments) comprising compounds of the invention. In another embodiment, the invention provides for administering compounds of Formula I or I—I and compositions comprising compounds of Formula I or any embodiment thereof to a patient (e.g., a human patient) in need thereof.
  • Compositions are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice. Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners. The effective amount of the compound to be administered will be governed by such considerations, and is the minimum amount necessary to inhibit DLK activity as required to prevent or treat the undesired disease or disorder, such as for example, neurodegeneration, amyloidosis, formation of neurofibrillary tangles, or undesired cell growth. For example, such amount may be below the amount that is toxic to normal cells, or the mammal as a whole.
  • In one example, the therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the invention administered parenterally per dose will be in the range of about 0.01-100 mg/kg, alternatively about e.g., 0.1 to 20 mg/kg of patient body weight per day, with the typical initial range of compound used being 0.3 to 15 mg/kg/day. The daily does is, in certain embodiments, given as a single daily dose or in divided doses two to six times a day, or in sustained release form. In the case of a 70 kg adult human, the total daily dose will generally be from about 7 mg to about 1,400 mg. This dosage regimen may be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response. The compounds may be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day.
  • The compounds of the present invention may be administered in any convenient administrative form, e.g., tablets, powders, capsules, solutions, dispersions, suspensions, syrups, sprays, suppositories, gels, emulsions, patches, etc. Such compositions may contain components conventional in pharmaceutical preparations, e.g., diluents, carriers, pH modifiers, sweeteners, bulking agents, and further active agents.
  • The compounds of the invention may be administered by any suitable means, including oral, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal, transdermal, parenteral, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intrapulmonary, intradermal, intrathecal and epidural and intranasal, and, if desired for local treatment, intralesional administration. Parenteral infusions include intramuscular, intravenous, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intraocular, intralesional or subcutaneous administration.
  • The compositions comprising compounds of Formula I any embodiment thereof are normally formulated in accordance with standard pharmaceutical practice as a pharmaceutical composition. A typical formulation is prepared by mixing a compound of the present invention and a diluent, carrier or excipient. Suitable diluents, carriers and excipients are well known to those skilled in the art and are described in detail in, e.g., Ansel, Howard C., et al., Ansel's Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2004; Gennaro, Alfonso R., et al. Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins, 2000; and Rowe, Raymond C. Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients. Chicago, Pharmaceutical Press, 2005. The formulations may also include one or more buffers, stabilizing agents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents, emulsifiers, suspending agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants, sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents, diluents and other known additives to provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in the manufacturing of the pharmaceutical product (i.e., medicament).
  • Suitable carriers, diluents and excipients are well known to those skilled in the art and include materials such as carbohydrates, waxes, water soluble and/or swellable polymers, hydrophilic or hydrophobic materials, gelatin, oils, solvents, water and the like. The particular carrier, diluent or excipient used will depend upon the means and purpose for which a compound of the present invention is being applied. Solvents are generally selected based on solvents recognized by persons skilled in the art as safe (GRAS) to be administered to a mammal. In general, safe solvents are non-toxic aqueous solvents such as water and other non-toxic solvents that are soluble or miscible in water. Suitable aqueous solvents include water, ethanol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycols (e.g., PEG 400, PEG 300), etc. and mixtures thereof. The formulations can also include one or more buffers, stabilizing agents, surfactants, wetting agents, lubricating agents, emulsifiers, suspending agents, preservatives, antioxidants, opaquing agents, glidants, processing aids, colorants, sweeteners, perfuming agents, flavoring agents and other known additives to provide an elegant presentation of the drug (i.e., a compound of the present invention or pharmaceutical composition thereof) or aid in the manufacturing of the pharmaceutical product (i.e., medicament).
  • Acceptable diluents, carriers, excipients and stabilizers are nontoxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed, and include buffers such as phosphate, citrate and other organic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid and methionine; preservatives (such as octadecyldimethylbenzyl ammonium chloride; hexamethonium chloride; benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride; phenol, butyl or benzyl alcohol; alkyl parabens such as methyl or propyl paraben; catechol; resorcinol; cyclohexanol; 3-pentanol; and m-cresol); low molecular weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, histidine, arginine, or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides and other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugars such as sucrose, mannitol, trehalose or sorbitol; salt-forming counter-ions such as sodium; metal complexes (e.g., Zn-protein complexes); and/or non-ionic surfactants such as TWEEN™, PLURONICS™ or polyethylene glycol (PEG). A active pharmaceutical ingredient of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or any embodiment thereof) can also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules and poly-(methylmethacylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are disclosed in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy: Remington the Science and Practice of Pharmacy (2005) 21st Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philidelphia, Pa.
  • Sustained-release preparations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or any embodiment thereof) can be prepared. Suitable examples of sustained-release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules. Examples of sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinyl alcohol)), polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919), copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate (Sidman et al., Biopolymers 22:547, 1983), non-degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate (Langer et al., J. Biomed. Mater. Res. 15:167, 1981), degradable lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as the LUPRON DEPOT™ (injectable microspheres composed of lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate) and poly-D-(−)-3-hydroxybutyric acid (EP 133,988A). Sustained release compositions also include liposomally entrapped compounds, which can be prepared by methods known per se (Epstein et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82:3688, 1985; Hwang et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 77:4030, 1980; U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,485,045 and 4,544,545; and EP 102,324A). Ordinarily, the liposomes are of the small (about 200-800 Angstroms) unilamelar type in which the lipid content is greater than about 30 mol % cholesterol, the selected proportion being adjusted for the optimal therapy.
  • The formulations include those suitable for the administration routes detailed herein. The formulations can conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and can be prepared by any of the methods well known in the art of pharmacy. Techniques and formulations generally are found in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy: Remington the Science and Practice of Pharmacy (2005) 21st Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philidelphia, Pa. Such methods include the step of bringing into association the active ingredient with the carrier which constitutes one or more accessory ingredients.
  • In general the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association the active ingredient with liquid carriers, diluents or excipients or finely divided solid carriers, diluents or excipients, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product. A typical formulation is prepared by mixing a compound of the present invention and a carrier, diluent or excipient. The formulations can be prepared using conventional dissolution and mixing procedures. For example, the bulk drug substance (i.e., compound of the present invention or stabilized form of the compound (e.g., complex with a cyclodextrin derivative or other known complexation agent) is dissolved in a suitable solvent in the presence of one or more of the excipients described above. A compound of the present invention is typically formulated into pharmaceutical dosage forms to provide an easily controllable dosage of the drug and to enable patient compliance with the prescribed regimen.
  • In one example, compounds of Formula I or any embodiment thereof may be formulated by mixing at ambient temperature at the appropriate pH, and at the desired degree of purity, with physiologically acceptable carriers, i.e., carriers that are non-toxic to recipients at the dosages and concentrations employed into a galenical administration form. The pH of the formulation depends mainly on the particular use and the concentration of compound, but preferably ranges anywhere from about 3 to about 8. In one example, a compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof is formulated in an acetate buffer, at pH 5. In another embodiment, the compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof are sterile. The compound may be stored, for example, as a solid or amorphous composition, as a lyophilized formulation or as an aqueous solution.
  • Formulations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) suitable for oral administration can be prepared as discrete units such as pills, capsules, cachets or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the invention.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder, lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, surface active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered active ingredient moistened with an inert liquid diluent. The tablets can optionally be coated or scored and optionally are formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therefrom.
  • Tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, e.g., gelatin capsules, syrups or elixirs can be prepared for oral use. Formulations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) intended for oral use can be prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions can contain one or more agents including sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preserving agents, in order to provide a palatable preparation. Tablets containing the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipient which are suitable for manufacture of tablets are acceptable. These excipients can be, for example, inert diluents, such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, such as maize starch, or alginic acid; binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc. Tablets can be uncoated or can be coated by known techniques including microencapsulation to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax can be employed.
  • An example of a suitable oral administration form is a tablet containing about 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 30 mg, 50 mg, 80 mg, 100 mg, 150 mg, 250 mg, 300 mg and 500 mg of the compound of the invention compounded with about 90-30 mg anhydrous lactose, about 5-40 mg sodium croscarmellose, about 5-30 mg polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) K30, and about 1-10 mg magnesium stearate. The powdered ingredients are first mixed together and then mixed with a solution of the PVP. The resulting composition can be dried, granulated, mixed with the magnesium stearate and compressed to tablet form using conventional equipment. An example of an aerosol formulation can be prepared by dissolving the compound, for example 5-400 mg, of the invention in a suitable buffer solution, e.g. a phosphate buffer, adding a tonicifier, e.g. a salt such sodium chloride, if desired. The solution may be filtered, e.g., using a 0.2 micron filter, to remove impurities and contaminants.
  • For treatment of the eye or other external tissues, e.g., mouth and skin, the formulations are preferably applied as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s) in an amount of, for example, 0.075 to 20% w/w. When formulated in an ointment, the active ingredient can be employed with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients can be formulated in a cream with an oil-in-water cream base.
  • If desired, the aqueous phase of the cream base can include a polyhydric alcohol, i.e., an alcohol having two or more hydroxyl groups such as propylene glycol, butane 1,3-diol, mannitol, sorbitol, glycerol and polyethylene glycol (including PEG 400) and mixtures thereof. The topical formulations can desirably include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. Examples of such dermal penetration enhancers include dimethyl sulfoxide and related analogs.
  • The oily phase of the emulsions of this invention can be constituted from known ingredients in a known manner. While the phase can comprise merely an emulsifier, it desirably comprises a mixture of at least one emulsifier with a fat or an oil or with both a fat and an oil. Preferably, a hydrophilic emulsifier is included together with a lipophilic emulsifier which acts as a stabilizer. It is also preferred to include both an oil and a fat. Together, the emulsifier(s) with or without stabilizer(s) make up the so-called emulsifying wax, and the wax together with the oil and fat make up the so-called emulsifying ointment base which forms the oily dispersed phase of the cream formulations. Emulsifiers and emulsion stabilizers suitable for use in the formulation of the invention include Tween® 60, Span® 80, cetostearyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, myristyl alcohol, glyceryl mono-stearate and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • Aqueous suspensions of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or an embodiment thereof) contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions. Such excipients include a suspending agent, such as sodium carboxymethylcellulose, croscarmellose, povidone, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate). The aqueous suspension can also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Formulations of a compound of the invention (e.g., compound of Formula I or I-I) can be in the form of a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. This suspension can be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above. The sterile injectable preparation can also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution in 1,3-butanediol or prepared as a lyophilized powder. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile fixed oils can conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid can likewise be used in the preparation of injectables.
  • The amount of active ingredient that can be combined with the carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration. For example, a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humans can contain approximately 1 to 1000 mg of active material compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which can vary from about 5 to about 95% of the total compositions (weight:weight). The pharmaceutical composition can be prepared to provide easily measurable amounts for administration. For example, an aqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion can contain from about 3 to 500 μg of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution in order that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/hr can occur.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous sterile injection solutions which can contain anti-oxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which can include suspending agents and thickening agents.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye also include eye drops wherein the active ingredient is dissolved or suspended in a suitable carrier, especially an aqueous solvent for the active ingredient. The active ingredient is preferably present in such formulations in a concentration of about 0.5 to 20% w/w, for example about 0.5 to 10% w/w, for example about 1.5% w/w.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert basis such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Formulations for rectal administration can be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising for example cocoa butter or a salicylate.
  • Formulations suitable for intrapulmonary or nasal administration have a particle size for example in the range of 0.1 to 500 microns (including particle sizes in a range between 0.1 and 500 microns in increments microns such as 0.5, 1, 30 microns, 35 microns, etc.), which is administered by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage or by inhalation through the mouth so as to reach the alveolar sacs. Suitable formulations include aqueous or oily solutions of the active ingredient. Formulations suitable for aerosol or dry powder administration can be prepared according to conventional methods and can be delivered with other therapeutic agents such as compounds heretofore used in the treatment of disorders as described below.
  • The formulations can be packaged in unit-dose or multi-dose containers, for example sealed ampoules and vials, and can be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water, for injection immediately prior to use. Extemporaneous injection solutions and suspensions are prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described. Preferred unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit daily sub-dose, as herein above recited, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of the active ingredient.
  • When the binding target is located in the brain, certain embodiments of the invention provide for a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) to traverse the blood-brain barrier. Certain neurodegenerative diseases are associated with an increase in permeability of the blood-brain barrier, such that a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) can be readily introduced to the brain. When the blood-brain barrier remains intact, several art-known approaches exist for transporting molecules across it, including, but not limited to, physical methods, lipid-based methods, and receptor and channel-based methods.
  • Physical methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, circumventing the blood-brain barrier entirely, or by creating openings in the blood-brain barrier.
  • Circumvention methods include, but are not limited to, direct injection into the brain (see, e.g., Papanastassiou et al., Gene Therapy 9:398-406, 2002), interstitial infusion/convection-enhanced delivery (see, e.g., Bobo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91 :2076-2080, 1994), and implanting a delivery device in the brain (see, e.g., Gill et al., Nature Med. 9:589-595, 2003; and Gliadel Wafers™, Guildford.
  • Pharmaceutical). Methods of creating openings in the barrier include, but are not limited to, ultrasound (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2002/0038086), osmotic pressure (e.g., by administration of hypertonic mannitol (Neuwelt, E. A., Implication of the Blood-Brain Barrier and its Manipulation, Volumes 1 and 2, Plenum Press, N.Y., 1989)), and permeabilization by, e.g., bradykinin or permeabilizer A-7 (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,112,596, 5,268,164, 5,506,206, and 5,686,416).
  • Lipid-based methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, encapsulating the a compound of formula I or I-I (or an embodiment thereof) in liposomes that are coupled to antibody binding fragments that bind to receptors on the vascular endothelium of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2002/0025313), and coating a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) in low-density lipoprotein particles (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0204354) or apolipoprotein E (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004/0131692).
  • Receptor and channel-based methods of transporting a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) across the blood-brain barrier include, but are not limited to, using glucocorticoid blockers to increase permeability of the blood-brain barrier (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2002/0065259, 2003/0162695, and 2005/0124533); activating potassium channels (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2005/0089473), inhibiting ABC drug transporters (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0073713); coating a compound of formula I or I-I (or an embodiment thereof) with a transferrin and modulating activity of the one or more transferrin receptors (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2003/0129186), and cationizing the antibodies (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,004,697).
  • For intracerebral use, in certain embodiments, the compounds can be administered continuously by infusion into the fluid reservoirs of the CNS, although bolus injection may be acceptable. The inhibitors can be administered into the ventricles of the brain or otherwise introduced into the CNS or spinal fluid. Administration can be performed by use of an indwelling catheter and a continuous administration means such as a pump, or it can be administered by implantation, e.g., intracerebral implantation of a sustained-release vehicle. More specifically, the inhibitors can be injected through chronically implanted cannulas or chronically infused with the help of osmotic minipumps. Subcutaneous pumps are available that deliver proteins through a small tubing to the cerebral ventricles. Highly sophisticated pumps can be refilled through the skin and their delivery rate can be set without surgical intervention. Examples of suitable administration protocols and delivery systems involving a subcutaneous pump device or continuous intracerebroventricular infusion through a totally implanted drug delivery system are those used for the administration of dopamine, dopamine agonists, and cholinergic agonists to Alzheimer's disease patients and animal models for Parkinson's disease, as described by Harbaugh, J. Neural Transm. Suppl. 24:271, 1987; and DeYebenes et al., Mov. Disord. 2: 143, 1987.
  • A compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) used in the invention are formulated, dosed, and administered in a fashion consistent with good medical practice. Factors for consideration in this context include the particular disorder being treated, the particular mammal being treated, the clinical condition of the individual patient, the cause of the disorder, the site of delivery of the agent, the method of administration, the scheduling of administration, and other factors known to medical practitioners. A compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) need not be, but is optionally formulated with one or more agent currently used to prevent or treat the disorder in question. The effective amount of such other agents depends on the amount of a compound of the invention present in the formulation, the type of disorder or treatment, and other factors discussed above.
  • These are generally used in the same dosages and with administration routes as described herein, or about from 1 to 99% of the dosages described herein, or in any dosage and by any route that is empirically/clinically determined to be appropriate.
  • For the prevention or treatment of disease, the appropriate dosage of a compound of formula I or I-I (or an embodiment thereof) (when used alone or in combination with other agents) will depend on the type of disease to be treated, the properties of the compound, the severity and course of the disease, whether the compound is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes, previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to the compound, and the discretion of the attending physician. The compound is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments. Depending on the type and severity of the disease, about 1 μg/kg to 15 mg/kg (e.g., 0.1 mg/kg-10 mg/kg) of compound can be an initial candidate dosage for administration to the patient, whether, for example, by one or more separate administrations, or by continuous infusion. One typical daily dosage might range from about 1 μg kg to 100 mg/kg or more, depending on the factors mentioned above. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment would generally be sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs. One exemplary dosage of a compound of formula I (or an embodiment thereof) would be in the range from about 0.05 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg. Thus, one or more doses of about 0.5 mg/kg, 2.0 mg/kg, 4.0 mg/kg, or 10 mg/kg (or any combination thereof) may be administered to the patient. Such doses may be administered intermittently, e.g., every week or every three weeks (e.g., such that the patient receives from about two to about twenty, or, e.g., about six doses of the antibody). An initial higher loading dose, followed by one or more lower doses may be administered. An exemplary dosing regimen comprises administering an initial loading dose of about 4 mg/kg, followed by a weekly maintenance dose of about 2 mg kg of the compound. However, other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.
  • Other typical daily dosages might range from, for example, about 1 g/kg to up to 100 mg/kg or more (e.g., about 1 μg kg to 1 mg/kg, about 1 μg/kg to about 5 mg/kg, about 1 mg kg to 10 mg/kg, about 5 mg/kg to about 200 mg/kg, about 50 mg/kg to about 150 mg/mg, about 100 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 100 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg, and about 200 mg/kg to about 400 mg/kg), depending on the factors mentioned above. Typically, the clinician will administer a compound until a dosage is reached that results in improvement in or, optimally, elimination of, one or more symptoms of the treated disease or condition. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional assays. One or more agent provided herein may be administered together or at different times (e.g., one agent is administered prior to the administration of a second agent). One or more agent may be administered to a subject using different techniques (e.g., one agent may be administered orally, while a second agent is administered via intramuscular injection or intranasally). One or more agent may be administered such that the one or more agent has a pharmacologic effect in a subject at the same time. Alternatively, one or more agent may be administered, such that the pharmacological activity of the first administered agent is expired prior the administration of one or more secondarily administered agents (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 secondarily administered agents).
    • E. Indications and Methods of Treatment
  • In another aspect, the invention provides for methods of inhibiting the Dual Leucine Zipper Kinase (DLK) in an in vitro (e.g., a nerve graft of nerve transplant) or in vivo setting (e.g., in a patient) by contacting DLK present in an in vitro or in vivo setting with compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof. In these methods of the invention, the inhibition of DLK signaling or expression with a compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof results in a downstream decrease in JNK phosphorylation (e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 phosphorylation), JNK activity (e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 activity), and/or JNK expression (e.g., a decrease in JNK2 and/or JNK3 expression). Accordingly, administering one or more compounds of Formula I or an embodiment thereof according to the methods of the invention can result in decrease in activity of kinase targets downstream of the DLK signalling cascade, e.g, (i) a decrease in JNK phosphorylation, JNK activity, and/or JNK expression, (ii) a decrease in cJun phosphorylation, cJun activity, and/or cJun expression, and/or (iii) a decrease in p38 phosphorylation, p38 activity, and/or p38 expression.
  • Compounds of the invention can be used in methods for inhibiting neuron or axon degeneration. The inhibitors are, therefore, useful in the therapy of, for example, (i) disorders of the nervous system (e.g., neurodegenerative diseases), (ii) conditions of the nervous system that are secondary to a disease, condition, or therapy having a primary effect outside of the nervous system, (iii) injuries to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma, (iv) pain, (v) ocular-related neurodegeneration, (vi) memory loss, and (vii) psychiatric disorders. Non-limiting examples of some of these diseases, conditions, and injuries are provided below.
  • Examples of neurodegenerative diseases and conditions that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), trigeminal neuralgia, glossopharyngeal neuralgia, Bell's Palsy, myasthenia gravis, muscular dystrophy, progressive muscular atrophy, primary lateral sclerosis (PLS), pseudobulbar palsy, progressive bulbar palsy, spinal muscular atrophy, progressive bulbar palsy, inherited muscular atrophy, invertebrate disk syndromes (e.g., herniated, ruptured, and prolapsed disk syndromes), cervical spondylosis, plexus disorders, thoracic outlet destruction syndromes, peripheral neuropathies, prophyria, mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's disease, Parkinson's disease, Parkinson's-plus diseases (e.g., multiple system atrophy, progressive supranuclear palsy, and corticobasal degeneration), dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia, demyelinating diseases (e.g., Guillain-Barre syndrome and multiple sclerosis), Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease (CMT; also known as Hereditary Motor and Sensory Neuropathy (HMSN), Hereditary Sensorimotor Neuropathy (HSMN), and Peroneal Muscular Atrophy), prion disease (e.g., Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Gerstmann-Straussler-Scheinker syndrome (GSS), fatal familial insomnia (FFI), and bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE, commonly known as mad cow disease)), Pick's disease, epilepsy, and AIDS demential complex (also known as HIV dementia, HIV encephalopathy, and HIV-associated dementia).
  • The methods of the invention can also be used in the prevention and treatment of ocular-relatcd neurodegeneration and related diseases and conditions, such as glaucoma, lattice dystrophy, retinitis pigmentosa, age-related macular degeneration (AMD), photoreceptor degeneration associated with wet or dry AMD, other retinal degeneration, optic nerve drusen, optic neuropathy, and optic neuritis. Non-limiting examples of different types of glaucoma that can be prevented or treated according to the invention include primary glaucoma (also known as primary open-angle glaucoma, chronic open-angle glaucoma, chronic simple glaucoma, and glaucoma simplex), low-tension glaucoma, primary angle-closure glaucoma (also known as primary closed-angle glaucoma, narrow-angle glaucoma, pupil-block glaucoma, and acute congestive glaucoma), acute angle-closure glaucoma, chronic angle-closure glaucoma, intermittent angle-closure glaucoma, chronic open-angle closure glaucoma, pigmentary glaucoma, exfoliation glaucoma (also known as pseudoexfoliative glaucoma or glaucoma capsulare), developmental glaucoma (e.g., primary congenital glaucoma and infantile glaucoma), secondary glaucoma (e.g., inflammatory glaucoma (e.g., uveitis and Fuchs heterochromic iridocyclitis)), phacogenic glaucoma (e.g., angle-closure glaucoma with mature cataract, phacoanaphylactic glaucoma secondary to rupture of lens capsule, phacolytic glaucoma due to phacotoxic meshwork blockage, and subluxation of lens), glaucoma secondary to intraocular hemorrhage (e.g., hyphema and hemolytic glaucoma, also known as erythroclastic glaucoma), traumatic glaucoma (e.g., angle recession glaucoma, traumatic recession on anterior chamber angle, postsurgical glaucoma, aphakic pupillary block, and ciliary block glaucoma), neovascular glaucoma, drug-induced glaucoma (e.g., corticosteroid induced glaucoma and alpha-chymotrypsin glaucoma), toxic glaucoma, and glaucoma associated with intraocular tumors, retinal deatchments, severe chemical burns of the eye, and iris atrophy.
  • Examples of types of pain that can be treated according to the methods of the invention include those associated with the following conditions: chronic pain, fibromyalgia, spinal pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, pain from cancer, arthritis, sciatica, headaches, pain from surgery, muscle spasms, back pain, visceral pain, pain from injury, dental pain, neuralgia, such as neuogenic or neuropathic pain, nerve inflammation or damage, shingles, herniated disc, torn ligament, and diabetes.
  • Certain diseases and conditions having primary effects outside of the nervous system can lead to damage to the nervous system, which can be treated according to the methods of the present invention. Examples of such conditions include peripheral neuropathy and neuralgia caused by, for example, diabetes, cancer, AIDS, hepatitis, kidney dysfunction, Colorado tick fever, diphtheria, HIV infection, leprosy, lyme disease, polyarteritis nodosa, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, Sjogren syndrome, syphilis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and amyloidosis.
  • In addition, the methods of the invention can be used in the treatment of nerve damage, such as peripheral neuropathy, which is caused by exposure to toxic compounds, including heavy metals (e.g., lead, arsenic, and mercury) and industrial solvents, as well as drugs including chemotherapeutic agents (e.g., vincristine and cisplatin), dapsone, HIV medications (e.g., Zidovudine, Didanosine. Stavudine, Zalcitabine, Ritonavir, and Amprenavir), cholesterol lowering drugs (e.g., Lovastatin, Indapamid, and Gemfibrozil), heart or blood pressure medications (e.g., Amiodarone, Hydralazine, Perhexiline), and Metronidazole.
  • The methods of the invention can also be used to treat injury to the nervous system caused by physical, mechanical, or chemical trauma. Thus, the methods can be used in the treatment of peripheral nerve damage caused by physical injury (associated with, e.g., burns, wounds, surgery, and accidents), ischemia, prolonged exposure to cold temperature (e.g., frost-bite), as well as damage to the central nervous system due to, e.g., stroke or intracranial hemorrhage (such as cerebral hemorrhage).
  • Further, the methods of the invention can be used in the prevention or treatment of memory loss such as, for example, age-related memory loss. Types of memory that can be affected by loss, and thus treated according to the invention, include episodic memory, semantic memory, short-term memory, and long-term memory. Examples of diseases and conditions associated with memory loss, which can be treated according to the present invention, include mild cognitive impairment, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, chemotherapy, stress, stroke, and traumatic brain injury (e.g., concussion).
  • The methods of the invention can also be used in the treatment of psychiatric disorders including, for example, schizophrenia, delusional disorder, schizoaffective disorder, schizopheniform, shared psychotic disorder, psychosis, paranoid personality disorder, schizoid personality disorder, borderline personality disorder, anti-social personality disorder, narcissistic personality disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder, delirium, dementia, mood disorders, bipolar disorder, depression, stress disorder, panic disorder, agoraphobia, social phobia, post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety disorder, and impulse control disorders (e.g., kleptomania, pathological gambling, pyromania, and trichotillomania).
  • In addition to the in vivo methods described above, the methods of the invention can be used to treat nerves ex vivo, which may be helpful in the context of nerve grafts or nerve transplants. Thus, the inhibitors described herein can be useful as components of culture media for use in culturing nerve cells in vitro.
  • Accordingly, in another aspect, the invention provides for a method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system (CNS) neuron or a portion thereof, the method comprising administering to the CNS neuron a compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof.
  • In one embodiment, of the method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system neuron or a portion thereof, the administering to the CNS neuron is performed in vitro.
  • In another embodiment, of the method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system neuron or a portion thereof, the method further comprises grafting or implanting the CNS neuron into a human patient after administration of the agent.
  • In another embodiment, of the method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system neuron or a portion thereof, the CNS neuron is present in a human patient.
  • In another embodiment, of the method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system neuron or a portion thereof, the administering to the CNS neuron comprises administration of said compound of formula I or an embodiment thereof in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
  • In another embodiment, of the method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system neuron or a portion thereof, the administering to the CNS neuron is carried out by an administration route selected from the group consisting of parenteral, subcutaneous, intravenous, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intralesional, intramuscular, intraocular, intraarterial interstitial infusion and implanted delivery device.
  • In another embodiment, of the method for inhibiting or preventing degeneration of a central nervous system neuron or a portion thereof, the method further comprises administering one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
  • The inhibitors can be optionally combined with or administered in concert with each other or other agents known to be useful in the treatment of the relevant disease or condition. Thus, in the treatment of ALS, for example, inhibitors can be administered in combination with Riluzole (Rilutek), minocycline, insulin-like growth factor 1 (IGF-1), and/or methylcobalamin. In another example, in the treatment of Parkinson's disease, inhibitors can be administered with L-dopa, dopamine agonists (e.g., bromocriptine, pergolide, pramipexole, ropinirole, cabergoline, apomorphine, and lisuride), dopa decarboxylase inhibitors (e.g., levodopa, benserazide, and carbidopa), and/or MAO-B inhibitors (e.g., selegiline and rasagiline). In a further example, in the treatment of Alzheimer's disease, inhibitors can be administered with acetylcholinesterase inhibitors (e.g., donepezil, galantamine, and rivastigmine) and/or NMDA receptor antagonists (e.g., memantine). The combination therapies can involve concurrent or sequential administration, by the same or different routes, as determined to be appropriate by those of skill in the art. The invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions and kits comprising combinations as described herein.
  • In addition to the combinations noted above, other combinations included in the invention are combinations of inhibitors of degeneration of different neuronal regions. Thus, the invention includes combinations of agents that (i) inhibit degeneration of the neuron cell body, and (ii) inhibit axon degeneration. For example, inhibitors of GSK and transcription are found to prevent degeneration of neuron cell bodies, while inhibitors of EGFR and p38 MAPK are found to prevent degeneration of axons. Thus, the invention includes combinations of inhibitors of GSK and EGFR (and/or p38 MAPK), combinations of transcription inhibitors and EGF (and/or p38 MAPK), and further combinations of inhibitors of dual leucine zipper-bearing kinase (DLK), glycogen synthase kinase 3β (GSK3), p38 MAPK, EGFF, phosphoinositide 3-kinase (PI3K), cyclin-dependentkinase 5 (cdk5), adenylyl cyclase, c-Jun N-terminal kinase (JNK), BCL2-associated X protein (Bax), In channel, calcium/calmodulin-dependent protein kinase kinase (CaMKK), a G-protein, a G-protein coupled receptor, transcription factor 4 (TCF4), and β-catenin. The inhibitors used in these combinations can be any of those described herein, or other inhibitors of these targets as described in WO 2011/050192, incorporated herein by reference.
  • The combination therapy can provide “synergy” and prove “synergistic”, i.e., the effect achieved when the active ingredients used together is greater than the sum of the effects that results from using the compounds separately. A synergistic effect can be attained when the active ingredients are: (1) co-formulated and administered or delivered simultaneously in a combined, unit dosage formulation; (2) delivered by alternation or in parallel as separate formulations; or (3) by some other regimen. When delivered in alternation therapy, a synergistic effect can be attained when the compounds are administered or delivered sequentially, e.g., by different injections in separate syringes, separate pills or capsules, or in separate infusions. In general, during alternation therapy, an effective dosage of each active ingredient is administered sequentially, i.e., serially, whereas in combination therapy, effective dosages of two or more active ingredients are administered together.
    • F. Examples
  • The invention will be more fully understood by reference to the following examples. They should not, however, be construed as limiting the scope of the invention. These examples are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention, but rather to provide guidance to a skilled artisan to prepare and use the compounds, compositions, and methods of the present invention. While particular embodiments of the present invention are described, the skilled artisan will appreciate that various changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
  • The chemical reactions in the Examples described can be readily adapted to prepare a number of other compounds of the invention, and alternative methods for preparing the compounds of this invention are deemed to be within the scope of this invention. For example, the synthesis of non-exemplified compounds according to the invention can be successfully performed by modifications apparent to those skilled in the art, e.g., by appropriately protecting interferring groups, by utilizing other suitable reagents known in the art other than those described, and/or by making routine modifications of reaction conditions. Alternatively, other reactions disclosed herein or known in the art will be recognized as having applicability for preparing other compounds of the invention. Accordingly, the following examples are provided to illustrate but not limit the invention.
  • In the Examples described below, unless otherwise indicated all temperatures are set forth in degrees Celsius. Commercially available reagents were purchased from suppliers such as Aldrich Chemical Company, Lancaster, TCI or Maybridge, and were used without further purification unless otherwise indicated. The reactions set forth below were done generally under a positive pressure of nitrogen or argon or with a drying tube (unless otherwise stated) in anhydrous solvents, and the reaction flasks were typically fitted with rubber septa for the introduction of substrates and reagents via syringe. Glassware was oven dried and/or heat dried. Column chromatography was conducted on a Biotage system (Manufacturer: Dyax Corporation) having a silica gel column or on a silica SEP PAK® cartridge (Waters); or alternatively column chromatography was carried out using on an ISCO chromatography system (Manufacturer: Teledyne ISCO) having a silica gel column. 1H NMR spectra were recorded on a Varian instrument operating at 400 MHz. 1H NMR spectra were obtained in deuterated CDCl3, d6-DMSO, CH3OD or d6-acetone solutions (reported in ppm), using tetramethylsilane (TMS) as the reference standard (0 ppm). When peak multiplicities are reported, the following abbreviations are used: s (singlet), d (doublet), t (triplet), q (quartet), m (multiplet), br (broadened), dd (doublet of doublets), dt (doublet of triplets). Coupling constants, when given, are reported in Hertz (Hz).
  • When possible, product formed in the reaction mixtures were monitored by LC/MS. High Pressure Liquid Chromatography—Mass Spectrometry (LCMS) experiments. Example conditions for analysis include monitoring on an Agilent 1200 Series LC coupled to a 6140 quadrupole mass spectrometer using a Supelco Ascentis Express C18 column with a linear gradient of 5%-95% acetonitrile/water (with 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid in each mobile phase) within 1.4 minutes and held at 95% for 0.3 minute, or on a PE Sciex API 150 EX using a Phenomenex DNYC monolithic C18 column with a linear gradient of 5%-95% acetonitrile/water (with 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid in each mobile phase) within 5 minutes and held at 95% for 1 minute to determine retention times (RT) and associated mass ions.
  • All abbreviations used to described reagents, reaction conditions, or equipment used are consistent with the definitions set forth in the “List of standard abbreviations and acronyms” published yearly by the Journal of Organic Chemistry (an American Chemical Society journal). The chemical names of discrete compounds of the invention were obtained using the structure naming features of commonly used programs including ChemBioDraw Version 11.0, Accelrys' Pipeline Pilot IUPAC compound naming program.
    • Example 1
  • Method A
    • 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00021
    • Step 1: Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]-heptane
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00022
  • The mixture of 4,6-dichloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidine (450 mg, 2.31 mmol), DIEA (894 mg, 6.92 mmol) and 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (328 mg, 2.42 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was stirred at 50° C. for 12 h. Water (20 mL) was added to and extracted with ethyl acetate (2×20 mL). The organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated to give (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo-[2.2.1]heptane (550 mg, 92.5% yield) as a white solid, which was used for next step without further purification LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=258.0.
    • Step 2: Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo-[2.2.1]heptane
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00023
  • To a mixture of (1S,4 S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (550 mg, 2.13 mmol) in DCM (50 mL) was added m-CPBA (1.73 g, 8.53 mmol) portionwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The mixture was washed with Na2SO3 (sat aq, 20 mL) and was concentrated in vacuo to afford (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]-heptane (600 mg, 97.0% yield) as a white solid, LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=289.7, which was used for next step without further purification.
    • Step 3: Synthesis of 6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00024
  • To a microwave vial charged with (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]-heptane (600 mg, 2.07 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyrimidin-2-amine (641 mg, 2.90 mmol), potassium acetate (284 mg, 2.90 mmol) and sodium carbonate (307 mg, 2.90 mmol) in acetonitrile/water (1 (5:1, 6.0 mL) was added PdCl2{PtBu2(Ph-p-NMe2)}2 (147 mg, 0.21 mmol) under nitrogen. The vial was sealed and heated by microwave irradiation at 140° C. for 40 min. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and resulting residue was purified by flash column chromatography (5% methanol in dichloromethane) to provide 6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine (380 mg, 52.7% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=349.0.
    • Step 4: Synthesis of 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4 S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00025
  • To the mixture of 6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine (380 mg, 1.09 mmol) and potassium carbonate (754 mg, 5.45 mmol) in DMSO (5 mL) was added 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane hydrochloride (326 mg, 2.73 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 100° C. for 5 h. After removal of the solvent, the residue was purified by Prep-HPLC (formic acid) to afford 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4 S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine (220 mg, 57% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=352.1; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 6.30-6.10 (m, 1H), 5.10-4.90 (m, 1H), 4.83 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 4.70-4.64 (m, 1H), 3.78-3.76 (m, 1H), 3.66-3.64 (m, 1H), 3.45-3.38 (m, 4H), 2.89-2.87 (m, 1H), 1.93-1.86 (m, 4H), 1.32-1.31 (m, 2H).
  • Method B:
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00026
    • Step 1: Synthesis of 5-(2,6-dichloropyrimidin-4-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00027
  • To a microwave vial charged with 2,4,6-trichloropyrimidine (300 mg, 1.64 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine (518 mg, 1.80 mmol) and cesium carbonate (1.07 g, 3.27 mmol) in acetonitrile/water (4:1, 30 mL) was added 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene-palladium(II)dichloride (60 mg, 0.05 mmol) under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and resulting residue was purified by flash column chromatography (15% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether to 50% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to provide 5-(2,6-dichloropyrimidin-4-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine (300 mg, 59.3% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=308.7.
    • Step 2: Synthesis of (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-chloropyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00028
  • To a solution of 5-(2,6-dichloropyrimidin-4-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine (300 mg, 0.84 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (60 mL) was added (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate hydrochloride (197 mg, 0.84 mmol) and N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (2 mL). The mixture was heated at 75° C. for 3 h. After cooling to room temperature, water (50 mL) was added to. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography (25% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether to 100% ethyl acetate) to provide (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-chloropyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate (220 mg, 48.1% yield). TLC (Thin layer chromatography) (petroleum ether (PE): ethyl acetate (EA)=3:1, Rf=0.3˜0.4).
    • Step 3: Synthesis of (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00029
  • To a solution of (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-chloropyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate (220 mg, 0.47 mmol) in DMSO (2 mL) was added 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane hydrochloride (68 mg, 0.56 mmol) and potassium carbonate (130 mg, 0.93 mmol). The mixture was heated at 90° C. for 16 h. After cooling to room temperature, water (50 mL) was added to. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL (3 times)). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography (50% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether to 100% ethyl acetate) to provide (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate (130 mg, 53.7% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=518.0.
    • Step 4: Synthesis of 5-(2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl )-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00030
  • To an ice-cooled solution of (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylate (130 mg, 0.25 mmol) in dichloromethane (6 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 0.5 h. After removal of the solvent, the residue was dissolved with water (30 mL), basified and extracted with dichloromethane (3×30 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated to provide 5-(2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine (80 mg, 75.0% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=417.9.
    • Step 5: Synthesis of 1-((1S,4 S)-5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)ethanone
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00031
  • To a solution of 5-(2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine (80 mg, 0.22 mmol) in DMSO (2 mL) was added acetic anhydride (46 mg, 0.44 mmol) and N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (0.1 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 25 min. The mixture was concentrated in vacuum and the residue was purified by Prep-HPLC (BASE) to provide 1-((1S,4 S)-5-(6-(6-amino-5-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)ethanone (46.34 mg, 40.0% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=459.9; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 6.79 (s, 2H), 6.53-6.21 (m, 1H), 5.10-4.89 (m, 1H), 4.80-4.78 (m, 1H), 4.74-4.63 (m, 1H), 3.55-3.51 (m, 1H), 3.44-3.35 (m, 2H), 3.23-2.84 (m, 4H), 2.82 (s, 1H), 2.00 (s, 1H), 1.91 (s, 3H), 1.83-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.29 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 2H).
  • Method C:
    • (1R,5 S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00032
    • Step 1: Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanoy)-3-azaicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00033
  • To a solution of (1R,5S,6r)-3-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-6-carboxylic acid (2 g, 8.8 mmol) in acetonitrile (150 mL) was added 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (1.71 g, 10.56 mmol). After stirring at 20° C. for 1 h, magnesium chloride (827 mg, 8.8 mmol) and potassium 3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanoate (1.5 g, 8.8 mmol) was added to and the reaction mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 16 h. The reaction solution was filtered, concentrated and purified by flash column (60% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to afford (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanoyl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (1.5 g, 57.7% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 4.21-4.16 (m, 2H), 3.66-3.64 (m, 1H), 3.54 (s, 3H), 3.42-3.90 (m, 2H), 2.15-2.13 (m, 2H), 1.90-1.88 (m, 1H), 1.42 (s, 9H), 1.28-1.24 (m, 3H)
    • Step 2: Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-mercaptopyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00034
  • The mixture of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanoyl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (7.6 g, 25.6 mmol), carbamimidothioic acid (7.77 g, 102.3 mmol) and sodium methanolate (5.52 g, 102.3 mmol) in anhydrous methonal (250 mL) was refluxed under N2 for 16 h. After removal of the solvent, the residue was adjusted pH to 6 with hydrogen chloride aqueous solution (2 M). The mixture was filtered and the solid was the desired product of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-mercaptopyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (7 g, 88.6% yield). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 12.30 (d, J=13.6 Hz, 2H), 5.45 (s, 1H), 3.57-3.53 (m, 2H), 3.33-3.29 (m, 2H), 2.05-1.99 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.57 (m, 1H), 1.39 (s, 9H).
    • Step 3: Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00035
  • To the solution of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-mercaptopyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (7 g, 22.65 mmol) in sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (8%) was added iodomethane (6.43 g, 45.3 mmol). The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was adjusted pH=5-6 with hydrogen chloride aqueous solution (2 M). The mixture was filtered and the solid was the desired product of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (6 g, crude, about 65%, 53.4% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=324.1.
    • Step 4: Synthesis of (1R,5 S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00036
  • To a solution of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-hydroxy-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (6 g, 18.57 mmol, 65%) in dry dichloromethane (250 mL) was added oxalyl dichloride (2.83 g, 22.3 mmol) and DMF (0.5 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 h and was poured into ice water including Et3N. The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (250 mL*2). The organic layer was washed with brine (100 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography (20% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to afford (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (3.8 g, 92.7% yield).
    • Step 5: Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00037
  • To a solution of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (800 mg, 2.35 mmol) in anhydrous dichloromethane (40 mL) was added m-CPBA (2 g, 11.7 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (2×50 mL). The organic layer was washed with brine (50 mL), dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography (30% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to provide (1R,5 S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (700 mg, 80% yield)1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 7.40 (s, 1H), 3.82-3.70 (m, 2H), 3.54-3.50 (m, 2H), 3.33 (s, 3H), 2.38 (s, 2H), 1.96-1.94 (m, 1H), 1.47 (s, 1H).
    • Step 6: Synthesis of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00038
  • To a microwave vial charged with (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(6-chloro-2-(methylsulfonyl)pyrimidin-4-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (820 mg, 2.2 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)aniline (972 mg, 4.4 mmol), and cesium carbonate (1.43 g, 4.4 mmol) in dioxane/water (5:1, 15 mL) was added 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene-palladium(II) dichloride (161 mg, 0.22 mmol) under nitrogen. The vial was sealed and heated by microwave irradiation at 110° C. for 30 min. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and resulting residue was purified by flash column chromatography (25% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether to 100% ethyl acetate) to provide (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (700 mg, 94.7% yield) LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=432.8.
    • Step 7: Synthesis of (1R,5 S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00039
  • To a solution of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (200 mg, 0.46 mmol) in DMSO (15 mL) was added 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane hydrochloride (109.5 mg, 0.92 mmol) and potassium carbonate (127 mg, 0.92 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 120° C. for 2 h. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (2×20 mL). The organic layer was concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography (75% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to provide (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (140 mg, 70% yield). TLC (EA, Rf=0.3-0.4).
    • Step 8: Synthesis of 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1R,5 S,6r)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-6-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00040
  • To an ice-cooled solution of (1R,5S,6r)-tert-butyl 6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate (120 mg, 0.276 mmol) in dichloromethane (6 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL). The mixture was warmed to room temperature. After 3 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to provide 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1R,5 S,6r)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-6-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine (90 mg, 97.3% yield). The resulting residue was used without further purification. TLC (EA, Rf=0).
    • Step 9: Synthesis of 1-((1R,5 S,6r)-6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)ethanone
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00041
  • To a solution of 2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-((1R,5 S,6r)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-6-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine (80 mg, 0.24 mmol) and N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (62 mg, 0.48 mmol) in dichloromethane (15 mL) was added acetic anhydride (49 mg, 0.48 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. After removal of the solvent, the residue was purified by PR-HPLC (BASE) to provide 1-((1R,5 S,6r)-6-(2′-amino-2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-6-yl)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)ethanone (88 mg, 97.2% yield). LCMS (ESI): [MH]+=377.8; 1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.94 (s, 2H), 6.65 (s, 1H), 5.49 (s, 2H), 4.95 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.97 (d, J=12.0 Hz, 1H), 3.72 (s, 2H), 3.54 (s, 3H), 2.95 (s, 1H), 2.30 (s, 2H), 2.06 (s, 3H), 2.00 (s, 2H), 1.70 (s, 1H), 1.45 (s, 2H).
  • Method D:
    • Preparation of 5-[6-(3-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-3-yl)-4-[(1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl]-2-pyridyl]-3-(difluoromethoxy)pyridin-2-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00042
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00043
    • Step 1: Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00044
  • To a microwave vial charged with 2,6-dichloro-4-iodopyridine (100 mg, 0.37 mmol), (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (49.19 mg, 0.44 mmol) and cesium carbonate (66.29 mg, 0.48 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) was added Pd2(dba)3 (3.5 mg, 0.048 mmol) and xantphos (3.5 mg, 0.048 mmol) under nitrogen. The vial was sealed and heated by microwave irradiation at 140° C. for 1 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and resulting residue was purified by TLC (PE:EA=2:1) to afford (1S,4S)-5-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (40 mg, 35% yield).
    • Step 2: Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-chloropyridin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00045
  • To a microwave vial charged with (1S,4S)-5-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (100 mg, 0.41 mmol) and 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane hydrochloride (244 mg, 2.04 mmol) in NMP (3 mL) was added cesium carbonate (1.33 g, 4.08 mmol). The vial was sealed and heated by microwave irradiation at 150° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and resulting residue was purified by TLC (PE:EA=1:1) to afford compound 5 (80 mg, 77.7% yield). LCMS (ESI) [MH]+=291.8.
    • Step 3: Synthesis of 5-[6-(3-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-3-yl)-4-[(1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl]-2-pyridyl]-3-(difluoromethoxy)pyridin-2-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00046
  • To a microwave vial charged with (1S,4S)-5-(2-(2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-2-yl)-6-chloropyridin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (70 mg, 0.24 mmol), 3-(difluoromethoxy)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-amine (75.53 mg, 0.26 mmol) and potassium carbonate (66.29 mg, 0.48 mmol) in dioxane/water (5:1, 3.0 mL) was added 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene-palladium(II)dichloride (3.5 mg, 0.048 mmol) under nitrogen. The vial was sealed and heated by microwave irradiation at 120° C. for 1 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo, and resulting residue was purified by PR-HPLC (Basic) to afford 5-[6-(3-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-3-yl)-4-[(1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl]-2-pyridyl]-3-(difluoromethoxy)pyridin-2-amine (24.55 mg, 24.6% yield). LCMS (ESI) [MH]+=416.1; 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.48 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.15 (t, J=74.0 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 6.21 (s, 2H), 5.54 (s, 1H), 4.76-4.74 (m, 2H), 4.62 (s, 1H), 3.73 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.63 (d, J=7.6 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 3.33 (s, 2H), 3.10 (d, J=10.4 Hz, 1H), 2.88-2.86 (m, 1H), 1.88-1.81 (m, 4H), 1.27-1.26 (m, 2H).
  • Method E:
    • Step 1—Synthesis of (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-methylsulfonyl-pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (70929-339-C)
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00047
  • To a solution of 4,6-dichloro-2-methylsulfonyl-pyrimidine (3.41 g, 15 mmol) and (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane hydrochloride (2.03 g, 15.0 mmol) in N,N-dimethylacetamide (40.5 mL), was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (6.60 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature. After 30 min, the reaction mixture was concentrated to a solid. The crude material was purified by column chromatography using an 80 g column, with a gradient of 0% to 100% ethyl acetate in heptane. The combined fractions containing product were concentrated under reduced pressure to provide (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-methylsulfonyl-pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (3.03 g). 1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 6.30 (s, 1H), 3.98-3.81 (m, 3H), 3.45-3.35 (m, 2H), 3.28 (s, 3H), 2.16-1.98 (m, 2H), 1.95-1.86 (m, 1H).
    • Step 2—Synthesis of 6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine (70929-339-E)
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00048
  • To a solution of (1S,4S)-5-(6-chloro-2-methylsulfonyl-pyrimidin-4-yl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane (500 mg, 1.73 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyrimidin-2-amine (382 mg, 1.73 mmol), and [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II) (63.8 mg, 0.0863 mmol) in acetonitrile (6.90 mL) was added potassium acetate in water (3.45 mL) in a microwave vial equipped with a stirbar. The mixture was microwaved at 110° C. for 5 min. The solid was and washed with ethyl acetate (5 mL) filtered under vacuum, providing 6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-2-(methylsulfonyl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine (598 mg, crude). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.02 (d, J=5.6, 2.8 Hz, 2H), 7.40-6.97 (m, 1H), 7.28 (s, 2H), 5.14 (d, J=16.0 Hz, 1H), 4.76 (d, J=27.9 Hz, 1H), 3.82 (d, J=7.7, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.76-3.66 (m, 1H), 3.60-3.51 (m, 1H), 3.50-3.41 (m, 1H), 3.35 (d, J=6.1 Hz, 3H), 1.95 (d, J=22.0 Hz, 2H).
    • Step 3—Synthesis of 2-(azetidin-1-yl)-6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00049
  • 5-[2-methylsulfonyl-6-[(1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl]pyrimidin-4-yl]pyrimidin-2-amine (30.0 mg, 0.861 mmol), azetidine hydrochloride (24.7 mg, 0.258 mmol), potassium carbonate (71.4 mg, 0.517 mmol), and 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone (0.861 mL) were combined in a reaction flask and heated to 130° C. for 16 hrs. The reaction was filtered and purified by reverse phase column chromatography using a gradient of 20% to 60% acetonitrile in 0.1% ammonium hydroxide in water. The combined fractions containing product were concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 2-(azetidin-1-yl)-6-((1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)-[4,5′-bipyrimidin]-2′-amine. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.87 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.99 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 4H), 3.77 (dd, J=7.3, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.64 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.43 (dd, J=10.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.40-3.32 (m, 1H), 3.17 (s, 1H), 2.24 (p, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 1.85 (s, 2H).
  • Method F:
    • Preparation of 6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)-5′-(trifluoromethyl)-[2,3′-bipyridin]-6′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00050
    • Step 1: Synthesis of 2,6-dichloro-4-(piperidin-4-yl)pyridine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00051
  • To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)piperidine-1-carboxylate (2 g, 6.06 mmol) in DCM(2 mL) was added TFA (3 mL). The solution was stirred at room temperature for 30 min. The reaction solution was concentrated to afford 2,6-dichloro-4-(piperidin-4-yl)pyridine as TFA salt, which was used without further purification. LCMS (ESI) [MH]+=231.1.
    • Step 2: Synthesis of 2,6-dichloro-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)pyridine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00052
  • A solution of 2,6-dichloro-4-(piperidin-4-yl)pyridine (2 g, 8.7 mmol) and oxetan-3-one (6.26 g, 87 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was stirred at 70° C. for 30 min and then sodium cyanoborohydride (2.74 g, 43.5 mmol) was added to the mixture and the mixture solution was stirred at 70° C. for additional 30 min. The reaction solution was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give crude product which was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (30% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to afford 2,6-dichloro-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)pyridine. (2 g, 88.7% yield). LCMS (ESI) [MH]+=286.7.
    • Step 3: Synthesis of 2-chloro-6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)pyridine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00053
  • A mixture of 2,6-dichloro-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)pyridine (450 mg, 1.57 mmol), 3-methoxyazetidine hydrochloride (963 mg, 7.83 mmol) and DIPEA (3 mL, 16.9 mmol) in DMSO (5 mL) was stirred at 100° C. for 16 h. The mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, evaporated and purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (30% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to give 2-chloro-6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)pyridine (320 mg, 60.3% yield). LCMS (ESI) [MH]+=337.8
    • Step 4: Synthesis of 6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)-5′-(trifluoromethyl)-[2,3′-bipyridin]-6′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00054
  • To a solution of 2-chloro-6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)pyridine (80 mg, 0.24 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-2-amine (140 mg, 0.48 mmol) and cesium carbonate (160 mg, 0.48 mmol) in dioxane/H2O (5:1, 4 mL) was added [1,1′-bis (diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium (II) (18 mg, 0.024 mmol) under nitrogen. The mixture was irradiated by microwave at 110° C. for 30 min. The reaction mixture was filtered, the filtrate was concentrated and purified by Prep-HPLC to afford 6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)-5′-(trifluoromethyl)-[2,3′-bipyridin]-6′-amine (68.3 mg 61.5%, yield). LCMS (ESI) [MH]+=464, 1HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl3), δ 8.745 (s, 1H), δ8.363 (s, 1H), δ8.232 (s, 1H), δ8.832 (s, 1H), δ6.109 (s, 1H), δ5.642 (s, 2H), δ4.74-4.67 (m, 4H),δ 4.39-4.22 (m, 3H), δ 3.94-3.90 (m, 2H), δ 3.63-3.56 (m, 1H), δ 3.346 (s, 3H), δ 2.980 (d, J=10.8 Hz, 2H), δ 2.55-2.46 (m, 1H), δ 2.06-1.99 (m, 1H), δ 1.93-1.87 (m, 4H). LCMS:464.0 (M+1).
  • Method G:
    • 6-(3-methoxyazetidin-1-yl)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)piperidin-4-yl)-5′-(trifluoromethyl)-[2,3′-bipyridin]-6′-amine Step 1: 1-(2,6-dichloro-4-pyridyl)cyclobutanecarbonitrile
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00055
  • To a stirring solution of 2,4,6-trichloropyridine (1.00 g, 5.48 mmol) and cyclobutanecarbonitrile (0.53 mL, 5.5 mmol) in anhydrous THF (27 mL) at −78° C. and under nitrogen was added lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (6.0 mL, 6.0 mmol, 1.0 M solution in THF). The cooling bath was removed and stirring continued for 1 h. The reaction was quenched by the addition of sat. aq. NH4Cl, extracted with CH2Cl2 and organics dried over MgSO4. Following concentration, the reaction residue was purified by flash column chromatography (100:0 heptanes/EtOAc—85:15 heptanes/EtOAc) to afford the title compound as a white solid (0.995 g, 76%); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.34 (s, 2H), 2.92-2.80 (m, 2H), 2.68-2.40 (m, 3H), 2.23-2.08 (m, 1H).
    • Step 2 1-[2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-6-(3-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-3-yl)-4-pyridyl]cyclobutanecarbonitrile
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00056
  • To a solution of 1-(2,6-dichloro-4-pyridyl)cyclobutanecarbonitrile (100 mg, 0.440 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (0.44 mL) was added 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane hydrochloride (60 mg, 0.48 mmol) and potassium carbonate (122 mg, 0.881 mmol). The vessel was sealed and the reaction mixture stirred at 100° C. for 92 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture was diluted with diethyl ether and washed with water (2×), brine (lx) and dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to dryness. The following compounds were added to the crude product: 2-aminopyridine-5-boronic acid pinacol ester (110 mg, 0.48 mmol), chloro(2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triisopropyl-1,1′-biphenyl) [2-(2-aminoethyl)phenyl)]palladium(II) (16.6 mg, 0.0220 mmol), 2-Dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triisopropylbiphenyl (21.4 mg, 0.0440 mmol), and potassium phosphate tribasic (289 mg, 1.32 mmol). Under a stream of nitrogen, anhydrous, degassed THF (1.3 mL) and degassed water (0.22 mL) were added and the vial was sealed tightly. The reaction mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 3 h, cooled to rt, and filtered through Celite, rinsing with CH2Cl2. The residue obtained after concentration was purified by RPLC to afford the title compound as a white solid (85.4 mg, 58% over 2 steps); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.92 (s, 2H), 7.10 (d, J=1.1 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (br s, 2H), 6.46 (d, J=1.1 Hz, 1H), 4.95-4.81 (m, 1H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 3.01-2.90 (m, 1H), 2.75-2.64 (m, 4H), 2.39-2.18 (m, 1H), 2.11-1.92 (m, 3H), 1.41-1.27 (m, 2H).
  • Method H:
    • [3-[6-[2-amino-4-(trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-5-yl]-2-methyl-pyrimidin-4-yl]-1-piperidyl]-phenyl-methanone
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00057
  • A solution of tert-butyl 3-(6-chloro-2-methyl-pyrimidin-4-yl)piperidine-1-carboxylate (40 mg, 0.13 mmol, 1.00 equiv), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-4-(trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-2-amine (40 mg, 0.14 mmol, 1.10 equiv) and [1,1′-BIS(DIPHENYLPHOSPHINO)FERROCENE]DICHLOROPALLADIUM(II) (10 mg, 0.013 mmol, 0.1 equiv) in Acetonitrile (1.0 mL) was mixed with 1M potassium carbonate solution in water (420 uL, 0.42 mmol, 3.2 equiv) and stirred at 90° C. for 2 hr. The reaction mixture was extracted with DCM (3 mL) and H2O (2 mL). The organic phase was removed, dried over sodium sulfate, and passed through a filter. The resulting organic phase was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was mixed with methanol (1.0 mL) and 4M hydrogen chloride in dioxane (325 uL, 1.3 mmol, 10 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum. A solution of crude product, benzoic acid (15 mg, 0.13 mmol, 1.0 equiv), HBTU (50 mg, 0.13 mmol, 1.0 equiv) and Triethylamine (90 uL, 0.65 mmol, 5.0 equiv) in DMF (1.0 mL) was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum and the crude product was purified by Prep-HPLC (Column, Sunfire C18 19×150; mobile phase, CH3CN:NH4CO3/H2O (10 mmol/L)=5%-85%, 10 min; Detector, UV 254 nm) to give 21.8 mg (38%) of
  • [3-[6-[2-amino-4-(trifluoromethyl)pyrimidin-5-yl]-2-methyl-pyrimidin-4-yl]-1-piperidyl]-phenyl-m ethanone as an off white solid, 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.63 (s, 1H), 7.66 (s, 2H), 7.46-7.42 (m, 3H), 7.42-7.36 (m, 2H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 4.65-4.37 (m, 1H), 4.08 (q, J=5.3 Hz, 1H), 3.77-3.51 (m, 1H), 3.17 (d, J=5.3 Hz, 2H), 3.14-2.89 (m, 3H), 2.10-2.02 (m, 1H), 1.91-1.50 (m, 3H).
  • Method I:
    • 1-[6-[6-amino-5-(difluoromethoxy)-3-pyridyl]-2-(3-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-3-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl]cyclobutanecarbonitrile Step 1: 1-(2,6-dichloropyrimidin-4-yl)cyclobutanecarbonitrile
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00058
  • To a stirring solution of 2,4,6-trichloropyrimidine (1.00 g, 5.45 mmol) and cyclobutanecarbonitrile (0.53 mL, 5.5 mmol) in anhydrous THF (27 mL) at −78° C. and under nitrogen was added lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (6.0 mL, 6.0 mmol, 1.0 M solution in THF) over 3 min. The cooling bath was removed after 5 further min, and stirring continued for 3 h. The reaction was quenched by the addition of sat. aq. NH4Cl, extracted with CH2Cl2 and organics dried over MgSO4. Following concentration, the reaction residue was purified by flash column chromatography (100:0 heptanes/EtOAc—85:15 heptanes/EtOAc) to afford the title compound as a colorless solid (0.147 g, 12%); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.54 (s, 1H), 2.97-2.82 (m, 2H), 2.82-2.67 (m, 2H), 2.51-2.35 (m, 1H), 2.35-2.16 (m, 1H).
    • Step 2 1-[6-[6-amino-5-(difluoromethoxy)-3-pyridyl]-2-(3-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexan-3-yl)pyrimidin-4-yl]cyclobutanecarbonitrile
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00059
  • Into a vial was weighed 1-(2,6-dichloropyrimidin-4-yl)cyclobutanecarbonitrile (64.2 mg, 0.281 mmol), 2-aminopyridine-5-boronic acid pinacol ester (64.2 mg, 0.281 mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (16.3 mg, 5 mol %), and sodium carbonate (90 mg, 0.84 mmol). Under a stream of nitrogen, anhydrous, degassed THF (0.84 mL) and degassed water (0.14 mL) were added and the vial was sealed tightly. The reaction mixture was stirred at 90° C. for 68 h, cooled to rt, filtered through Celite rinsing with CH2Cl2, and concentrated to dryness. To this crude product was added 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane hydrochloride (49 mg, 0.39 mmol), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.147 mL, 0.844 mmol), and anhydrous DMF (1.1 mL). The vessel was sealed and the reaction mixture stirred at 80° C. for 4.5 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture was concentrated and the residue subjected to RPLC purification to yield the title compound as a white solid (36.9 mg, 39% over 2 steps); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.23 (t, J=74.0 Hz, 2H), 7.20 (s, 1H), 6.70 (br s, 2H), 4.95 (m, 1H), 3.54 (s, 2H), 2.99-2.91 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 2H), 2.72-2.60 (m, 2H), 2.32-2.18 (m, 1H), 2.13-1.94 (m, 3H), 1.45-1.38 (m, 2H).
  • Method J:
    • Step 1: tert-butyl 3-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00060
  • Under a nitrogen atmosphere, zinc dust (6.91 g, 105 mmol) was suspended in N,N-dimethylacetamide (10 mL) and 1,2-dibromoethane (1.08 mL, 12.4 mmol) was added, followed by careful addition of trimethylsilylchloride (1.61 mL, 12.4 mmol) and was added cautiously over 5 min while the flask sat on a bed of ice. The bath was removed, and after stirring for a further 15 min, a solution of N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-3-iodoazetidine (25.1 g, 86.9 mmol) in N,N-dimethylacetamide (30 mL) was added over 30 min and stirring was continued for an additional 30 min. In the open atmosphere, this mixture was filtered through Celite as quickly as possible, rinsing with N,N-dimethylacetamide (100 mL). The resulting yellow solution was injected into a separately prepared, nitrogen flushed vessel containing [1,1-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (2.56 g, 3.10 mmol), copper(I) iodide (1.18 g, 6.21 mmol) and 2,6-dichloro-4-iodopyridine (17.0 g, 62.1 mmol) and this mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 19.5 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water (3×). On the third time, filtration through Celite was necessary to break the emulsion, following which, the organics were washed with brine and then dried over MgSO4. After being freed of volatiles, the resultant residue was purified by flash column chromatography (100:0-70:30 heptanes/EtOAc) to afford tert-butyl 3-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate as a white solid (10.98 g, 58%); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.22 (s, 2H), 4.35 (dd, J=8.7, 5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.92 (dd, J=8.7, 5.6 Hz, 2H), 3.73-3.61 (m, 1H), 1.47 (s, 9H).
    • Step 2: 2,6-dichloro-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)azetidin-3-yl)pyridine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00061
  • A solution of tert-butyl 3-(2,6-dichloropyridin-4-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate (0.940 g, 3.10 mmol) in trifluoroacetic acid (3.1 mL) was stirred for 1 h, and then concentrated to dryness to afford the TFA salt as a white solid. The solid was re-suspended in anhydrous THF (12.4 mL) and submitted to the action of triethylamine (2.62 mL, 18.6 mmol) and 3-oxetanone (0.60 mL, 9.3 mmol). After stirring for 10 min, sodium triacetoxyborohydride (2.07 g, 9.30 mmol) was added and stirring continued for 18.5 h at 35° C. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with sat. aq. NaHCO3 and organics dried over MgSO4. Concentration gave sufficiently pure 2,6-dichloro-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)azetidin-3-yl)pyridine as a yellow liquid (640 mg, 80% over 2 steps); 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.27 (s, 2H), 4.72 (dd, J=6.5, 5.3 Hz, 2H), 4.54 (dd, J=6.5, 5.3 Hz, 2H), 3.82-3.77 (m, 1H), 3.77-3.71 (m, 2H), 3.67-3.58 (m, 1H), 3.32-3.27 (m, 2H).
    • Step 3: 6-cyclopropyl-5′-(difluoromethoxy)-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)azetidin-3-yl)-[2,3′-bipyridin]-6′-amine
  • Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00062
  • A vial was charged with 2,6-dichloro-4-(1-(oxetan-3-yl)azetidin-3-yl)pyridine (133 mg, 0.513 mmol), palladium(II) acetate (5.8 mg, 5 mol %), butyldi-1-adamantylphosphine (14.5 mg, 7.5 mol %), potassium cyclopropyltrifluoroborate (79.9 mg, 0.523 mmol), and cesium carbonate (502 mg, 1.54 mmol) and purged under nitrogen before the addition of degassed toluene (2.6 mL) and deionized water (0.25 mL). The mixture was stirred at 110° C. overnight and then cooled to rt. To the mixture was added 3-(difluoromethoxy)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-amine (220 mg, 0.770 mmol), chloro(2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triisopropyl-1,1′-biphenyl) [2-(2-aminoethyl)phenyl)]palladium(II) (38.7 mg, 0.0513 mmol), 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triisopropylbiphenyl (50.0 mg, 0.103 mmol), and potassium phosphate tribasic monohydrate (366 mg, 1.54 mmol). The vial was purged with nitrogen gas, sealed, and stirred at 110° C. for 2 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture was concentrated to dryness. The reaction residue thus obtained was purified by flash column chromatography (100:0-80:20 CH2Cl2/MeOH) and by RPLC to afford the title compound as a white solid (22.9 mg, 12% over 2 steps); 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.53 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (t, J=74.0 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (s, 1H), 6.35 (br s, 2H), 4.62-4.50 (m, 2H), 4.45-4.32 (m, 2H), 3.82-3.70 (m, 1H), 3.70-3.60 (m, 3H), 3.28-3.23 (m, 2H), 2.17-2.03 (m, 1H), 1.05-0.85 (m, 4H).
    • Example 2
  • The compounds disclosed in Table 1 were prepared following the synthetic steps described in general Methods A-J as described above in Example 1 with modifying the starting reactants and/or intermediates and in those methods as would be known to one skilled in the art in view of the final compound structures to arrive at the compounds in Table 1. The compounds disclosed in Table 1 were tested for DLK inhibitory activity as described in Example 3.
  • TABLE 1
    DLK Ki MS
    No (μM) Structure 1H NMR [MH]+ Method
    1 6.43
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00063
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.63 (d, J = 21.2 Hz, 1H), 7.66 (s, 2H), 7.58-7.40 (m, 6H), 4.12-3.89 (m, 1H), 3.80-3.52 (m, 4H), 3.17 (d, J = 4.7 Hz, 1H), 2.66-2.56 (m, 3H), 2.41-2.04 (m, 2H). 429 H
    2 1.7
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00064
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.02 (s, 2H), 7.79-7.59 (m, 1H), 7.50-7.41 (m, 3H), 7.41-7.36 (m, 2H), 7.24 (s, 2H), 7.12- 6.91 (m, 1H), 4.62- 4.44 (m, 1H), 3.76- 3.53 (m, 1H), 3.19- 2.80 (m, 3H), 2.64- 2.59 (m, 2H), 2.10- 2.02 (m, 1H), 1.89- 1.47 (m, 3H). 375 H
    3 6.43
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00065
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.63 (s, 1H), 7.66 (s, 2H), 7.46- 7.42 (m, 3H), 7.42- 7.36 (m, 2H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 4.65-4.37 (m, 1H), 4.08 (q, J = 5.3 Hz, 1H), 3.77-3.51 (m, 1H), 3.17 (d, J = 5.3 Hz, 2H), 3.14-2.89 (m, 3H), 2.10-2.02 (m, 1H), 1.91-1.50 (m, 3H). 443 H
    4 1.73
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00066
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.05 (s, 1H), 9.00 (s, 1H), 7.83- 7.68 (m, 1H), 7.58- 7.50 (m, 2H), 7.51- 7.39 (m, 3H), 7.28- 7.22 (m, 2H), 4.00- 3.43 (m, 4H), 2.65- 2.55 (m, 3H), 2.42- 2.06 (m, 2H). 361 H
    5 0.83
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00067
         		390 I
    6 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00068
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.61 (s, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 7.17 (t, J = 73.9 Hz, 1H), 6.45 (s, 2H), 5.01 (s, 1H), 4.68 (s, 1H), 3.91 (t, 2H), 3.81-3.69 (m, 3H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.47 (d, J= 10.6, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.40-3.23 (m, 1H), 2.46 (q, J = 7.4, 6.9 Hz, 1H), 1.87 (s, 2H). 441 E
    7 0.10
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00069
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 4.98 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 4.08 (t, J= 12.1 Hz, 2H), 3.88-3.71 (m, 3H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.47 (d, J= 10.3 Hz, 1H), 3.37 (s, 1H), 2.17-1.95 (m, 2H), 1.88 (s, 2H), 1.78-1.58 (m, 2H). 390 E
    8 0.22
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00070
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s,2H), 5.11- 4.74 (m, 2H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.98 (s, 2H), 3.78 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H), 3.73- 3.55 (m, 3H), 3.45 (d, 1H), 2.00-1.76 (m, 4H), 1.76-1.58 (m, 2H). 372 E
    9 0.11
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00071
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.94 (s, 2H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 5.34 (s,2H), 4.97-4.95 (m, 1H), 4.69-4.62 (m, 4H), 3.83-3.78 (m, 1H), 3.55 (s, 2H), 3.14 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.94- 2.93 (m, 1H), 2.50 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.35- 2.33 (m, 1H), 2.13 (s, 2H), 1.99 (s, 2H), 1.46- 1.44 (m, 2H). 392.2 C
    10 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00072
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.65 (s, 1H), 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.64 (s, 1H), 7.21 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 6.72 (s, 2H), 3.78-3.73 (m, 2H), 3.65-3.60 (m, 1H), 3.40-3.35 (m, 1H), 2.27-2.16 (m, 5H), 1.85 (t, J = 3.2 Hz, 1H), 1.00-0.93 (m, 7H). 416.1 C
    11 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00073
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.65 (s, 1H), 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.64 (s, 1H), 7.21 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 6.72 (s, 2H), 3.76-3.73 (m, 2H), 3.69-3.68 (m, 1H), 3.39-3.36 (m, 1H), 2.26-2.24 (m, 1H), 2.18-2.17 (m, 1H), 2.11-2.10 (m, 1H), 1.94 (s, 3H), 1.86 (t, J = 3.2 Hz, 1H), 1.00-0.97 (m, 4H). 402.1 C
    12 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00074
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 6.79 (s, 2H), 6.53-6.21 (m, 1H), 5.10-4.89 (m, 1H), 4.80-4.78 (m, 1H), 4.74-4.63 (m, 1H), 3.55-3.51 (m, 1H), 3.44-3.35 (m, 2H), 3.23-2.84 (m, 4H), 2.82 (s, 1H), 2.00 (s, 1H), 1.91 (s, 3H), 1.83-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.29 (d, J = 2.0 Hz, 2H). 459.9 B
    13 0.20
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00075
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.59 (s, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 6.72 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 4.97- 4.94 (m, 3H), 3.56 (s, 2H), 3.28 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 3.15-3.08 (m, 2H), 2.95-2.93 (m, 1H), 2.78 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.25 (d, J = 2.8 Hz, 1H), 2.12 (s, 2H), 1.99 (s, 2H), 1.49-1.43 (m, 2H). 483.14 C
    14 0.43
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00076
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.92 (s, 2H), 7.09 (s, 2H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 4.83 (br.s, 1H), 3.43 (s, 2H), 3.26-3.24 (m, 2H), 3.13 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.89-2.87 (m, 1H), 2.74-2.72 (m, 2H), 2.12-2.11 (m, 1H), 2.03 (s, 2H), 1.93 (s, 2H), 1.30-1.29 (m, 2H). 418.1 C
    15 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00077
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.74 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.04 (s, 1H), 6.91 (s, 2H), 4.84-4.82 (m, 1H), 4.05 (s, 1H), 3.45 (s, 3H), 3.19 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.91-2.89 (m, 1H), 2.35 (s, 2H), 2.26 (s, 1H), 1.98-1.95 (m, 4H), 1.33-1.32 (m, 2H), 1.08 (s, 6H). 491.2 C
    16 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00078
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.94 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 7.06 (s, 1H), 6.91 (s, 2H), 4.83-4.81 (m, 1H), 4.02 (s, 1H), 3.42 (s, 2H), 3.16-3.14 (m, 2H), 2.87-2.85 (m, 1H), 2.48 (s, 2H), 2.31 (s, 2H), 2.23 (s, 1H), 1.95-1.92 (m, 4H), 1.29 (d, J = 2.8 Hz, 2H), 1.05 (s, 6H). 475.0 C
    17 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00079
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.59 (s, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 6.68 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 4.98 (s, 3H), 3.56 (s, 2H), 3.31- 3.28 (m, 2H), 3.01- 2.94 (m, 2H), 2.75 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.50 (s, 2H), 2.26 (s, 1H), 2.10 (s, 2H), 1.99 (s, 2H), 1.80-1.70 (m, 2H), 1.19 (s, 6H). 473.17 C
    18 0.05
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00080
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.72 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 7.07 (s, 1H), 6.94 (s, 2H), 4.85-4.83 (m, 1H), 3.74-3.65 (m, 3H), 3.45-3.40 (m, 3H), 2.95-2.91 (m, 1H), 2.23-2.17 (m, 2H), 1.96-1.93 (m, 4H), 1.74 (s, 1H), 1.33 (s, 2H), 1.30-1.22 (m, 1H). 460.9 C
    19 0.03
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00081
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 6.94 (s, 2H), 4.84-4.82 (m, 1H), 3.71-3.64 (m, 3H), 3.43-3.35 (m, 2H), 3.34-3.31 (m, 1H), 3.26-3.21 (m, 1H), 2.89-2.87 (m, 1H), 2.21-2.14 (m, 2H), 1.94-1.90 (m, 4H), 1.73-1.71 (m, 1H), 1.31 (d, J = 4.0 Hz, 2H). 445.0 C
    20 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00082
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.62 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 6.85 (s, 1H), 3.80-3.70 (m, 1H), 3.54-3.50 (m, 3H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 3.20 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 2H), 2.95- 2.90 (m, 1H), 2.71- 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.58- 2.55 (m, 2H), 2.29 (s, 1H), 2.09-2.04 (m, 3H), 1.42-1.41 (m, 1H), 1.29 (s, 3H). 477.14 C
    21 0.007
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00083
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.92 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 6.91 (s, 2H), 4.82-4.81 (m, 1H), 3.42-3.37 (m, 8H), 3.36-3.34 (m, 2H), 3.21 (s, 2H), 3.06 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 2.87-2.84 (m, 1H), 2.58-2.57 (m, 1H), 2.39 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 2.20 (s, 1H), 1.97- 1.93 (m, 3H), 1.29 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H). 461.0 C
    22 0.03
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00084
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.94 (s, 2H), 6.66 (s, 1H), 5.21 (s, 2H), 4.96 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.54 (s, 2H), 3.50-3.47 (m, 2H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 3.22 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.96- 2.94 (m, 1H), 2.72- 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.51 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.35- 2.32 (m, 1H), 2.09 (s, 2H), 1.99 (s, 2H), 1.46- 1.44 (m, 2H). 393.9 C
    23 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00085
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.57 (s, 1H), 8.10 (s, 1H), 6.52 (br.s, 1H), 5.08 (br.s, 1H), 4.71 (s, 1H), 3.86 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.52 (d, J = 10.0 Hz, 1H), 3.35-3.31 (m, 1H), 2.06-2.02 (m, 1H), 2.01-1.96 (m, 2H), 1.08-1.05 (m, 2H), 0.95-0.92 (m, 2H). 394.19 A
    24 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00086
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.88 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 4.30-4.22 (m, 1H), 4.21-4.13 (m, 2H), 3.86-3.73 (m, 3H), 3.71-3.61 (m, 2H), 3.43 (d, J = 10.4, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 3.24 (s, 3H), 1.89 (s, 2H). 355 E
    25 1.09
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00087
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.87 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.76 (d, J = 7.2, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.64 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.43 (d, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 1.85 (s, 2H), 1.26 (s, 5H). 353 E
    26 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00088
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.36 (s, 1H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 6.92 (t, J = 72.0 Hz, 1H), 6.24 (br.s, 1H), 4.96- 4.90 (m, 3H), 4.79- 4.74 (m, 2H), 4.55 (s, 2H), 4.10 (s, 1H), 3.81 (s, 1H), 3.62 (s, 2H), 3.55-3.52 (m, 1H), 3.04-2.97 (m, 3H), 2.11-2.06 (m, 3H), 1.96-1.94 (m, 1H), 1.51-1.44 (m, 2H). 472.0 B
    27 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00089
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.58 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.12 (t, J = 74.0 Hz, 1H), 6.27 (s, 1H), 6.10 (s, 2H), 5.30 (br.s, 1H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.86 (d, J= 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.65-3.57 (m, 2H), 3.48 (s, 3H), 3.44-3.42 (m, 1H), 3.16-3.11 (m, 3H), 2.91-2.89 (m, 1H), 1.95-1.88 (m, 4H), 1.34-1.20 (m, 8H). 516.0 B
    28 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00090
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.59 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.18 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 6.47 (s, 2H), 6.16 (br.s, 1H), 4.99 (br.s, 1H), 4.84-4.70 (m, 2H), 4.13-4.09 (m, 1H), 3.92-3.91 (m, 1H), 3.56-3.50 (m, 5H), 3.30-3.24 (m, 5H), 2.90-2.88 (m, 1H), 1.94-1.85 (m, 3H), 1.31-1.20 (m, 2H). 488.0 B
    29 0.005
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00091
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.61 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.39- 6.96 (m, 1H), 6.66- 6.12 (m, 3H), 5.51- 5.39 (m, 1H), 5.38- 5.26 (m, 1H), 5.01 (s, 1H), 4.68 (s, 1H), 4.02- 3.84 (m, 2H), 3.79 (d, J = 7.2, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 3.75 -3.56 (m, 3H), 3.47 (d, J = 10.4, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 3.37 (s, 1H), 1.87 (s, 2H). 441 E
    30 0.81
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00092
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 7.13 (s, 2H), 7.11 (s, 1H), 4.93 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H), 3.51 (s, 2H), 2.98- 2.91 (m, 3H), 2.76 (t, J = 2.8 Hz, 1H), 2.01 (d, J = 16.4 Hz, 4H), 1.47 (dd, J = 3.9, 1.7 Hz, 2H), 1.36 (dd, J = 4.3, 1.7 Hz, 2H), 1.24 (s, 1H). 336 C
    31 0.03
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00093
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.57 (s, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.35- 6.93 (m, 1H), 6.43 (s, 2H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.99 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 4H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.64 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.44 (d, J = 10.0 Hz, 1H), 2.31-2.18 (m, 2H), 1.85 (s, 2H). 391 E
    32 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00094
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.59 (s, 1H), 7.95 (s, 1H), 7.36- 6.95 (m, 1H), 6.46 (s, 2H), 5.58-5.33 (m, 1H), 4.98 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 4.40-4.26 (m, 2H), 4.06 (d, 1H), 4.00 (d, J = 11.1, 3.2 Hz, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 7.2, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 1H), 1.86 (s, 2H). 409 E
    33 1.07
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00095
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 6.32 (s, 1H), 4.97 (s, 2H), 4.69-4.59 (m, 2H), 3.82-3.74 (m, 2H), 3.67 (dd, J = 7.3, 5.9 Hz, 2H), 3.45 (td, J = 8.6, 7.4, 4.3 Hz, 3H), 3.33 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 1.89-1.77 (m, 4H). 368 E
    34 0.024
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00096
         		427 E
    35 0.17
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00097
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 7.10 (s, 2H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 4.91 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H), 3.50 (s, 2H), 3.15 (q, J = 10.2 Hz, 3H), 2.96-2.90 (m, 1H), 2.88-2.80 (m, 1H), 2.01-1.88 (m, 6H), 1.72-1.65 (m, 2H), 1.65-1.56 (m, 2H), 1.35 (dd, J = 4.3, 1.7 Hz, 2H). 446 C
    36 0.22
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00098
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.85 (s, 2H), 6.07 (br.s, 1H), 4.87 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.54 (br.s, 1H), 3.83 (s, 1H), 3.51 (s, 3H), 3.34- 3.30 (m, 1H), 3.11- 3.08 (m, 1H), 2.89- 2.88 (m, 1H), 2.61- 2.50 (m, 2H), 1.98- 1.92 (m, 4H), 1.38 (d, J = 4.0 Hz, 2H), 1.06 (dd, J = 6.0, 15.2 Hz, 6H). 393.22 B
    37 0.22
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00099
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.86 (s, 2H), 6.11 (br.s, 1H), 4.88 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.60 (br.s, 1H), 3.70 (s, 4H), 3.40-3.31 (m, 1H), 2.95-2.91 (m, 2H), 2.66-2.56 (m, 3H), 2.00-1.86 (m, 4H), 1.41-1.40 (m, 2H), 1.10 (t, J = 3.2 Hz, 3H). 379.23 B
    38 0.29
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00100
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.95 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H), 6.25 (br.s, 1H), 4.83 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 4.56 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H), 4.35 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 4.28 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.90-3.88 (m, 1H), 3.60-3.50 (m, 1H), 3.45 (s, 2H), 3.20-3.15 (m, 2H), 2.89-2.87 (m, 1H), 2.85-2.81 (m, 1H), 2.68-2.66 (m, 1H), 1.93 (s, 2H), 1.84- 1.82 (m, 1H), 1.80- 1.75 (m, 1H), 1.32- 1.15 (m, 2H). 407.2 B
    39 0.07
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00101
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.93 (s, 2H), 7.04 (s, 2H), 6.31 (s, 1H), 5.49-5.34 (m, 2H), 4.85 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.91-3.84 (m, 2H), 3.69-3.61 (m, 2H), 3.47 (s, 2H), 2.90- 2.88 (m, 1H), 1.94 (s, 2H), 1.32-1.23 (m, 2H). 359.8 B
    40 0.004
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00102
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.59 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.18 (t, J = 74.0 Hz, 1H), 6.47 (s, 2H), 6.17 (br.s, 1H), 4.98 (br.s, 1H), 4.84-4.67 (m, 2H), 3.56-3.54 (m, 1H), 3.50-3.38 (m, 4H), 3.33-3.26 (m, 2H), 2.88 (d, J = 3.2 Hz, 1H), 2.03 (s, 1H), 1.94 (s, 3H), 1.87-1.84 (m, 2H), 1.32-1.31 (m, 2H). 457.9 B
    41 0.28
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00103
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 7.11 (s, 2H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 4.89 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.57-4.50 (m, 1H), 4.31-4.21 (m, 1H), 3.48 (s, 2H), 3.18- 3.09 (m, 1H), 2.95- 2.90 (m, 1H), 2.00 (s, 3H), 2.00-1.94 (m, 3H), 1.91-1.70 (m, 7H), 1.34 (dd, J = 4.4, 1.8 Hz, 2H). 406 C
    42 0.17
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00104
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 5.91- 5.77 (m, 1H), 5.18- 5.08 (m, 2H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 4.53- 4.44 (m, 2H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.2, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.41- 3.32 (m, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (dd, J = 10.6, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.18 (t, J = 12.1 Hz, 2H), 2.43 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 2.37 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 1.86 (s, 2H), 1.83-1.72 (m, 2H), 1.72-1.51 (m, 2H). 412 E
    43 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00105
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 3.14- 2.98 (m, 1H), 2.82- 2.72 (m, 1H), 2.41 (s, 1H), 2.13 (d, J = 3.4 Hz, 3H), 1.96 (d, J = 10.5 Hz, 1H), 1.86 (s, 3H), 1.53 (d, J = 10.6 Hz, 1H), 3.38-3.31 (m, 1H), 8.89 (d, J = 10.6 Hz, 2H), 6.94 (s, 2H), 5.02-4.88 (m, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 4.47-4.27 (m, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (s, 1H), 3.55-3.39 (m, 3H). 395 E
    44 0.07
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00106
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.87-3.72 (m, 5H), 3.41-3.32 (m, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.46 (d, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 2.31-2.17 (m, 2H), 2.10-1.96 (m, 2H), 1.92-1.78 (m, 4H). 404 E
    45 1.75
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00107
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.89 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 3.71 (t, J = 4.9 Hz, 4H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.44 (d, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 3.33 (s, 1H), 2.74-2.64 (m, 1H), 2.27 (t, J = 5.0 Hz, 4H), 1.97 (qd, J = 7.2, 3.1 Hz, 2H), 1.92-1.72 (m, 4H), 1.72-1.54 (m, 2H). 409 E
    46 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00108
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.88 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.76 (d, J = 7.2. 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.68 (s, 4H), 3.64 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.43 (d, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 2.24 (s, 4H), 2.13 (s, 3H), 1.85 (s, 2H), 1.71 (t, J = 5.3 Hz, 4H). 409 E
    47 0.07
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00109
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.88 (s, 2H), 6.94 (s, 2H), 4.93 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.2, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.63-3.51 (m, 4H), 3.45 (d, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 1.87 (t, 2H), 1.14 (t, 6H). 342 E
    48 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00110
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.75-3.68 (m, 4H), 3.41-3.32 (m, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (d, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 3.17 (s, 1H), 2.34 (t, J = 5.0 Hz, 4H), 2.20 (s, 3H), 1.86 (s.2H). 369 E
    49 0.54
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00111
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.89 (s, 2H), 6.96 (s, 2H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.82-3.69 (m, 5H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.49-3.41 (m, 1H), 3.40-3.32 (m, 1H), 1.92-1.80 (m, 2H), 1.67-1.56 (m, 2H), 1.56-1.45 (m, 4H). 354 E
    50 0.41
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00112
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.87 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.99 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 4H), 3.77 (dd, J = 7.3, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.64 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.43 (dd, J = 10.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.40- 3.32 (m, 1H), 3.17 (s, 1H), 2.24 (p, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 1.85 (s, 2H). 326 E
    51 0.20
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00113
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 6.31 (s, 1H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.84-3.69 (m, 3H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.51-3.41 (m, 3H), 2.89 (q, J = 9.3, 8.1 Hz, 2H), 2.48-2.31 (m, 2H), 2.16-1.98 (m, 2H), 1.86 (s, 2H). 416 E
    52 0.086
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00114
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.95 (s, 2H), 6.27 (s, 1H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.3, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.58- 3.41 (m, 5H), 1.96- 1.79 (m, 6H). 340 E
    53 0.27
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00115
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 7.03 (s, 2H), 6.35 (s, 1H), 4.99 (s, 1H), 4.68 (s, 1H), 4.41 (t, J = 12.6 Hz, 4H), 3.78 (dd, J = 7.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.50-3.42 (m, 1H), 3.40-3.31 (m, 1H), 1.87 (s, 2H). 362 E
    54 0.16
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00116
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.89 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 4.19 (d, J = 9.3, 3.2 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (d,J = 9.2, 2.8 Hz, 2H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.44 (d, J = 10.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 2.11-1.99 (m, 2H), 1.86 (s, 2H). 402 E
    55 0.13
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00117
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.84-3.58 (m, 5H), 3.49-3.41 (m, 2H), 3.04-2.90 (m, 2H), 2.28-2.08 (m, 2H), 2.08-1.96 (m, 1H), 1.86 (s, 2H), 1.68-1.57 (m, 1H). 416 E
    56 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00118
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.88 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 4.08 (d, J = 9.0, 3.2 Hz, 2H), 3.82-3.71 (m, 3H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.43 (d, J = 10.6, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.17 (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 1H), 2.62 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.34 (s, 3H), 2.05-1.97 (m, 2H), 1.85 (s, 2H), 1.73- 1.62 (m, 2H). 395 E
    57 0.12
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00119
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.89 (s, 2H), 6.96 (s, 2H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.84-3.79 (m, 4H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.2, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (d, J = 10.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 1.86 (s, 2H), 1.41-1.28 (m, 4H), 0.34 (s, 4H). 380 E
    58 0.21
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00120
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 7.09 (s, 2H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 4.92 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.58 (t, J = 6.2 Hz, 2H), 4.35 (t, J = 5.7 Hz, 2H), 3.73-3.65 (m, 1H), 3.50 (s, 2H), 3.13 (s, 2H), 2.93 (dd, J = 6.8, 3.2 Hz, 1H), 2.90- 2.79 (m, 1H), 2.02- 1.81 (m, 6H), 1.69- 1.57 (m, 4H), 1.35 (dd, J = 4.3, 1.8 Hz, 2H) 420 C
    59 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00121
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.94 (s, 2H), 6.65 (s, 1H), 5.49 (s,2H), 4.95 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.97 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 3.72 (s, 2H), 3.54 (s, 3H), 2.95 (s, 1H), 2.30 (s, 2H), 2.06 (s, 3H), 2.00 (s, 2H), 1.70 (s, 1H), 1.45 (s, 2H). 377.8 C
    60 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00122
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 6.40- 6.14 (m, 1H), 4.83 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.99 (s, 1H), 3.68-3.60 (m, 1H), 3.45 (s,2H), 3.28- 3.27 (m, 2H), 3.04 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H), 2.89- 2.87 (m, 1H), 2.57- 2.54 (m, 1H), 2.45- 2.41 (m, 2H), 1.93- 1.91 (m, 2H), 1.82- 1.71 (m, 2H), 1.32- 1.29 (m, 2H), 1.23- 1.15 (m, 1H), 1.04 (s, 6H). 423.2 B
    61 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00123
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.84 (s, 2H), 6.09 (br.s, 1H), 4.95-4.87 (m, 2H), 4.67 (br.s, 1H), 3.71 (s, 1H), 3.62-3.52 (m, 4H), 3.48-3.45 (m, 1H), 3.34-3.31 (m, 3H), 3.00-2.95 (m, 1H), 2.92-2.90 (m, 1H), 2.76-2 74 (m, 2H), 2.67-2.64 (m, 1H), 1.98-1.94 (m, 3H), 1.88-1.82 (m, 1H), 1.42-1.38 (m, 2H). 409.2 B
    62 0.003
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00124
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.57 (s, 1H), 7.96 (s, 1H), 7.17 (t, J = 74.0 Hz, 1H), 6.44 (s, 2H), 6.30 (br.s, 1H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.86-3.76 (m, 3H), 3.64 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.45-3.40 (m, 4H), 1.85 (s, 2H), 1.61- 1.58 (m, 2H), 0.71- 0.66 (m, 1H), 0.14- 0.11 (m, 1H). 416.8 A
    63 0.53
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00125
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.98 (s, 2H), 1.17 (s, 1H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 3.99 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 3.74- 3.72 (m, 2H), 3.56 (dd, J = 4.0, 12.4 Hz, 1H), 2.33-2.29 (m, 2H), 2.25-2.20 (m, 1H), 2.07 (s, 3H), 1.80-1.78 (m, 1H), 1.13-1.11 (m, 2H), 1.04-1.02 (m, 2H). 336.9 C
    64 0.27
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00126
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.91 (s,2H), 6.92 (br s, 2H), 6.50 (s, 1H), 5.03 (br s, 1H), 4.80 (d, J = 6.9 Hz, 1H), 4.36 (br s, 1H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 2.85 (m, 1H), 2.18- 1.51 (m, 14H), 1.39- 1.27 (m, 2H). 378 I
    65 0.04
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00127
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.93 (s, 2H), 6.99 (s, 2H), 5.49- 5.38 (m, 1H), 5.38- 5.26 (m, 1H), 5.00 (s, 1H), 4.68 (s, 1H), 3.44- 3.32 (m, 1H), 4.03- 3.84 (m, 2H), 3.78 (d, J = 7.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.75- 3.57 (m, 3H), 3.46 (d, J = 10.5, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 3.37 (s, 1H), 1.95- 1.80 (m, 2H). 376 E
    66 0.03
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00128
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.93 (s, 2H), 6.99 (s, 2H), 5.00 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.91 (t, J = 13.5 Hz, 2H), 3.80-3.68 (m, 3H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.46 (d, 1H), 3.37 (s, 1H), 1.87 (s, 2H). 376 E
    67 0.65
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00129
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.89 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 5.45 (d, J = 57.9, 6.1, 3.2 Hz, 1H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 4.40-4.25 (m, 2H),, 4.12-4.03 (m, 1H), 4.03-3.96 (m, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.3, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.44 (d, J = 10.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.41- 3.31 (m, 1H), 3.35 (s, 1H), 1.86 (s, 2H). 395 E
    68 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00130
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.5, 1.7 Hz, 1H), 3.74-3.61 (m, 5H), 3.45 (d, J = 10.5, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 3.35 (s, 1H), 2.56 (t, J = 5.0 Hz, 4H), 1.86 (s, 2H), 1.68- 1.59 (m, 1H), 0.43 (m, 2H), 0.36 (q, J = 3.2, 2.6 Hz, 2H). 395 E
    69 0.11
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00131
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 2H), 4.75 (s, 2H), 4.67 (s, 2H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.5, 1.7 Hz, 2H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 3.64-3.50 (m, 1H),), 3.56 (t, J = 8.9 Hz, 1H), 3.50-3.40 (d, 1H), 3.40- 3.35 (m, 3H), 3.45 (d, J = 9.9, 1.7 Hz, 1H), 2.93 (s, 1H), 2.28-2.10 (m, 1H), 2.10-1.96 (m, 1H), 1.89 (d, J = 18.5 Hz, 4H). 402 E
    70 0.22
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00132
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.85 (d, J = 13.2 Hz, 2H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 7.3, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 2.64-2.52 (m, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.46 (d, J = 10.5, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 3.35 (s, 1H), 2.82 (t, J = 12.8 Hz, 2H), 1.86 (d, J = 11.0 Hz, 4H), 1.45- 1.28 (m, 2H). 422 E
    71 0.09
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00133
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.92 (s, 2H), 7.10 (d, J = 1.1 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (br s, 2H), 6.46 (d, J = 1.1 Hz, 1H), 4.88 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 3.01-2.90 (m, 1H), 2.75-2.64 (m, 4H), 2.39-2.18 (m, 1H), 2.11-1.92 (m, 3H), 1.41-1.27 (m, 2H). 333 G
    72 0.04
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00134
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.23 (t, J = 74.0 Hz, 2H), 7.20 (s, 1H), 6.70 (br s, 2H), 4.95 (m, 1H), 3.54 (s, 2H), 2.99-2.91 (m, 1H), 2.81 (m, 2H), 2.72- 2.60 (m, 2H), 2.32- 2.18 (m, 1H), 2.13 1.94 (m, 3H), 1.45 1.38 (m, 2H). 399 I
    73 0.002
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00135
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 6.72 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 5.90 (s, 1H), 4.73-4.68 (m, 1H), 3.62 (br.s, 2H), 3.37 (s, 2H), 3.30 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 2H), 2.75- 2.73 (m, 1H), 1.83 (s, 2H), 1.51-1.50 (m, 2H), 1.24-1.22 (m, 2H), 0.64-0.61 (m, 1H), 0.02-0.01 (m, 1H). 401.0 A
    74 0.05
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00136
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.54 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 5.92 (s, 1H), 4.96 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 2H), 4.89 (s, 2H), 4.70 (s, 1H), 3.92- 3.87 (m, 2H), 3.58 (s, 2H), 3.52-4.94 (m, 2H), 2.92-2.90 (m, 1H), 1.96-1.93 (m, 4H), 1.68-1.66 (m, 1H), 1.48-1.46 (m, 2H), 0.96-0.94 (m, 2H), 0.69-0.67 (m, 2H). 390.9 A
    75 0.009
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00137
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.28 (s, 1H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 6.21 (br.s, 2H), 5.92 (s, 2H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.80 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 4.67-4.61 (m, 2H), 3.75 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.63 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.43-3.42 (m, 4H), 2.87-2.85 (m, 1H), 1.91-1.83 (m, 4H), 1.32-1.21 (m, 8H). 409.2 A
    76 0.008
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00138
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.51 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.2 Hz, 1H), 6.29 (s, 1H), 5.12 (br.s, 1H), 4.91 (s, 2H), 4.74 (s, 1H), 3.91-3.87 (m, 2H), 3.51-3.44 (m, 2H), 2.12-2.05 (m, 1H), 2.00-1.92 (m, 2H), 1.15-1.07 (m, 2H), 0.97-0.95 (m, 2H). 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 8 8.63 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.18 (t, 7 = 74.0 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (br.s, 1H), 6.54 (s, 2H), 5.02 (s, 1H), 4.69 (s, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 6.8 376.1 376.1 A
    Hz, 1H), 3.64 (d, J = 7.2
    Hz, 1H), 3.48-3.45 (m,
    2H), 1.99-1.88 (m,
    3H), 0.99-0.88 (m,
    4H).
    77 0.16
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00139
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DM SO) δ 8.94 (s, 2H), 8.40 (s, 1H), 7.12 (s, 2H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 4.93 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 1H), 3.81 (s, 2H), 3.04-2.94 (m, 2H), 2.95-2.90 (m, 1H), 2.03-1.95 (m, 4H), 1.94-1.76 (m, 7H), 1.35 (dd, J = 4.4, 1.7 Hz, 2H). 364 C
    78 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00140
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.92 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 4.98 (s, 1H), 4.68 (s, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 6.7 Hz, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.46 (d, J = 10.1 Hz, 1H), 3.10-2.52 (m, 4H), 1.87 (s, 2H), 0.96 (s, 1H), 0.55 (d, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 0.21 (s, 2H), 3.10- 2.52 (m, 4H). 409 E
    79 0.06
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00141
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.48 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.15 (t, 7 = 74.0 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 6.21 (s, 2H), 5.54 (s, 1H), 4.76- 4.74 (m, 2H), 4.62 (s, 1H), 3.73 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.63 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 3.33 (s, 2H), 3.10 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 1H), 2.88-2.86 (m, 1H), 1.88-1.81 (m, 4H), 1.27-1.26 (m, 2H). 416.1 D
    80 0.08
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00142
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 6.99 (s, 2H), 6.38 (br.s, 1H), 4.97-4.91 (m, 2H), 4.62 (s, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.67 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.47-3.41 (m, 4H), 2.96-2.90 (m, 1H), 1.98 (s, 2H), 1.87-1.79 (m, 2H), 1.33 (d, J = 2.8 Hz, 2H). 351.8 B
    81 0.038
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00143
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.89 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 6.54- 6.10 (br.s, 1H), 5.08- 4.96 (br.s, 1H), 4.66- 4.62 (m, 1H), 3.84- 3.81 (m, 2H), 3.77- 3.75 (m, 1H), 3.63 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.44- 3.39 (m, 4H), 1.85 (s, 2H), 1.60-1.58 (m, 2H), 0.73-0.66 (m, 1H), 0.14-0.12 (m, 1H). 352.19 B
    82 0.034
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00144
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 6.68- 6.12 (br.s, 1H), 5.11- 4.95 (br.s, 1H), 4.88- 4.65 (m, 2H), 3.55- 3.33 (m, 5H), 3.28- 3.23 (m, 1H), 2.88 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 2.02 (s, 2H), 1.93 (s, 3H), 1.86- 1.83 (m, 2H), 1.31 (s, 2H). 393.15 B
    83 0.17
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00145
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 5.92 (s, 1H), 5.22 (s, 3H), 5.00-4.93 (m, 1H), 4.15-4.12 (m, 1H), 3.80 (s, 1H), 3.75- 3.72 (m, 1H), 3.55 (s, 2H), 3.45-3.41 (m, 1H), 3.21-3.18 (m, 1H), 2.95-2.93 (m, 1H), 2.74-2.71 (m, 1H), 2.50-2.47 (m, 1H), 2.00 (s, 2H), 1.47 (d, J = 4.0 Hz, 2H). 399.8 B
    84 0.051
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00146
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 6.50- 6.15 (m, 1H), 4.83 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.69 (s, 1H), 3.51-3.48 (m, 3H), 3.45-3.40 (m, 2H), 3.08-3.05 (m, 1H), 2.89-2.88 (m, 1H), 2.68-2.64 (m, 1H), 2.02 (s, 1H), 1.87- 1.86 (m, 1H), 1.82- 1.77 (m, 1H), 1.38 (s, 3H), 1.33-1.32 (m, 2H). 433.1 A
    85 0.05
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00147
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.87 (s, 2H), 6.94 (s, 2 H), 6.39 (s, 1H), 4.78-4.76 (m, 1H), 4.54 (br.s, 2H), 2.84-2.83 (m, 1H), 2.46 (s, 2 H), 1.88 (s, 4H), 1.75-1.67 (m, 5H), 1.42-1.27 (m, 5H). 363.9 A
    86 0.21
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00148
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 9.01 (s, 2H), 7.21 (br s, 2H), 7.20 (s, 1H), 5.06-4.80 (m, 1H), 3.54 (s, 2H), 2.99- 2.89 (m, 1H), 2.85- 2.73 (m, 2H), 2.70- 2.59 (m, 2H), 2.34- 2.14 (m, 1H), 2.14- 1.90 (m, 3H), 1.45- 1.33 (m, 2H). 334 I
    87 0.21
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00149
         		370 B
    88 0.41
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00150
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.96 (s, 2H), 7.14-7.02 (m, 3H), 4.90 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 4.49 (dt, J = 19.6, 6.2 Hz, 4H), 3.57-3.45 (m, 3H), 2.97-2.87 (m, 1H), 2.76-2.66 (m, 4H), 2.62 (s, 1H), 2.10- 2.03 (m, 2H), 1.98 (s, 2H), 1.62 (s, 4H), 1.40- 1.33 (m, 2H). 420 C
    89 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00151
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.71 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 6.80 (s, 2H), 6.23 (br.s, 1H), 5.00 (br.s, 1H), 4.82 (d, J =6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.47-3.45 (m, 4H), 2.90-2.88 (m, 1H), 1.94-1.86 (m, 4H), 1.32-1.31 (m, 2H). 434.9 A
    90 0.13
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00152
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 2H), 6.43- 6.09 (m, 1H), 4.90- 4.65 (m, 2H), 3.69- 3.61 (m, 1H), 3.50- 3.39 (m, 5H), 2.88 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 2H), 2.79- 2.76 (m, 1H), 1.93 (s, 2H), 1.73-1.64 (m, 2H), 1.31-1.28 (m, 2H). 351.18 B
    91 0.1
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00153
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DM SO) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 7.08 (s, 2H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 4.89 (d, J = 6.7 Hz, 1H), 3.49 (s, 2H), 2.96- 2.90 (m, 1H), 2.81- 2.68 (m, 5H), 2.55 (s, 2H), 1.97 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, 2H), 1.68-1.51 (m, 4H), 1.35 (dd, J = 4.3, 1.8 Hz, 2H) 364 C
    92 0.002
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00154
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.56 (s, 1H), 7.95 (s, 1H), 7.18 (t, J = 73.9 Hz, 1H), 6.38 (br s, 2H), 6.36-6.00 (m, 1H), 4.82 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.77-4.45 (m, 1H), 3.45 (s, 2H), 3.42- 3.34 (m, 1H), 3.16- 3.04 (m, 1H), 2.88 (dd, J = 6.9, 3.1 Hz, 1H), 2.61 (s, 1H), 1.93 (s, 2H), 1.73-1.44 (m, 5H), 1.41-1.26 (m, 3H). 415 E
    93 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00155
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.88 (s, 2H), 6.93 (s, 2H), 6.35-6.10 (m, 1H), 4.82 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.77-4.42 (m, 1H), 3.44 (s, 2H), 3.37 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H), 3.21- 2.98 (m, 1H), 2.91- 2.83 (m, 1H), 2.61 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 1H), 1.92 (s, 2H), 1.72-1.52 (m, 4H), 1.51-1.43 (m, 1H), 1.36 (t, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H), 1.31 (dd, J = 4.3, 1.6 Hz, 2H). 350 E
    94 0.028
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00156
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.89 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 6.19 (s, 1H), 4.82 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 1H),3.74 (br.s, 2H), 3.44-3.38 (m, 4H), 2.88-2.87 (m, 1H), 1.92-1.87 (m, 2H), 1.65 (s, 2H), 1.31 (s, 2H), 0.73-0.72 (m, 1H), 0.13-0.12 (m, 1H). 335.8 A
    95 0.68
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00157
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.76 (s, 2H), 6.45 (br.s, 1H), 5.02-4.98 (m, 1H), 4.63 (s, 1H), 3.78-3.77 (m, 1H), 3.70-3.68 (m, 1H), 3.43-3.42 (m, 1H), 3.38-3.30 (m, 1H), 1.98-1.97 (m, 1H), 1.88-1.85 (m, 2H), 1.18-0.97 (m, 2H), 0.86-0.83 (m, 2H). 311.19 A
    96 0.14
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00158
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 6.41 (s, 1H), 4.81-4.79 (m, 1H), 4.70-4.44 (m, 2H), 3.43 (s, 2H), 2.70- 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.25- 2.24 (m, 2H), 1.92 (s, 2H), 1.80-1.73 (m, 4H), 1.64-1.61 (m, 2H), 1.31-1.30 (m, 2H), 0.95 (s, 3H). 394.2 A
    97 0.32
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00159
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.88 (s, 2H), 6.08 (s, 1H), 5.70 (s, 2H), 4.94 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 4.21 (d, J = 12.8 Hz, 2H), 3.72- 3.64 (m, 2H), 3.57 (s, 2H), 2.94-2.91 (m, 1H), 2.62-2.56 (m, 2H), 1.98 (d, J = 2.0 Hz, 2H), 1.47 (dd, J = 2.0, 4.4 Hz, 2H), 1.28 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 6H). 368.0 A
    98 0.101
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00160
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.85 (s, 2H), 6.30 (s, 1H), 4.88- 4.86 (m, 1H), 4.44- 4.43 (m, 2H), 4.12- 4.06 (m, 2H), 3.53 (s, 2H), 3.10 (dd, J = 2.0, 12.8 Hz, 2H), 2.92- 2.90 (m, 1H), 2.00 (s, 1H), 1.95-1.91 (m, 2H), 1.87-1.79 (m, 3H), 1.40 (dd, J = 2.0, 4.4 Hz, 2H). 365.9 A
    99 0.043
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00161
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2 H), 6.34 (s, 1H), 4.84-4.82 (m, 2H), 3.40 (s, 4H), 2.96- 2.86 (m, 2H), 1.95 (d, J = 19.6 Hz, 4 H), 1.32- 1.31 (m, 4H). 336.1 A
    100 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00162
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.58 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.18 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 6.47 (s, 2H), 6.25 (br.s, 1H), 5.00-4.97 (m, 1H), 4.85-4.83 (m, 1H), 4.68 (s, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.52- 3.46 (m, 4H), 2.90- 2.89 (m, 1H), 1.95- 1.87 (m, 4H), 1.32 (s, 2H). 416.9 A
    101 0.026
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00163
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 7.26 (br.s, 2H), 6.50 (br.s, 1H), 5.04-5.01 (m, 1H), 4.86 (s, 1H), 4.68 (s, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.47-3.44 (m, 4H), 2.92-2.89 (m, 1H), 1.95-1.87 (m, 4H), 1.35-1.33 (m, 2H). 375.9 A
    102 0.024
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00164
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.23 (s, 1H), 6.66 (s, 2H), 6.30-6.20 (m, 1H), 5.04-4.98 (m, 1H), 4.93-4.83 (m, 1H), 4.71-4.67 (m, 1H), 3.77 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.52-3.44 (m, 4H), 2.90-2.88 (m, 1H), 1.94-1.91 (m, 2H), 1.90-1.86 (m, 2H), 1.33-1.31 (m, 2H). 385.0 A
    103 0.018
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00165
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO + H2O-d6) δ 8.76- 8.75 (m, 1H), 8.32- 8.28 (m, 1H), 6.60- 6.10 (m, 1H), 5.20- 5.00 (m, 1H), 4.90- 4.88 (m, 1H), 4.69- 4.70 (m, 1H), 3.79- 3.77 (m, 2H), 3.51- 3.48 (m, 4H), 2.93- 2.91 (m, 1H), 2.02- 1.99 (m, 2H), 1.95- 1.89 (m, 2H), 1.35 (s, 2H). 419.0 A
    104 0.069
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00166
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.90 (s, 2H), 6.97 (s, 2H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 4.82-4.80 (m, 1H), 4.59-4.54 (m, 4H), 3.90-3.86 (m, 1H), 2.89-2.87 (m, 1H), 2.26-2.25 (m, 2H), 1.99-1.86 (m, 7H), 1.65-1.61 (m, 2H), 1.32-1.30 (m, 2H). 380.1 A
    105 1.36
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00167
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.86 (s, 2H), 6.75 (s, 2H), 6.61 (d, J = 1.7 Hz, 1H), 5.81 (d, J = 1.7 Hz, 1H), 4.82-4.72 (m, 1H), 4.35 (s, 2H), 3.68 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 2H), 3.44 (d, J = 10.9 Hz, 2H), 3.37 (s, 2H), 2.95-2.87 (m, 1H), 1.97-1.91 (m, 6H), 1.30 (dd, J = 4.3, 1.8 Hz, 2H). 365 D
    106 0.98
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00168
         		1H NMR (400 MH/. DMSO) δ 8.84 (s, 2H), 6.73 (s, 2H), 6.49 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1H), 5.67 (d, J = 1.6 Hz, 1H), 4.77 (dd, J = 5.4, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 4.63 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.36 (s, 2H), 2.96-2.88 (m, 2H), 1.92 (dd, J = 16.5, 1.6 Hz, 4H), 1.35-1.25 (m, 4H). 335 D
    107 0.13
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00169
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.92 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 6.52 (s, 1H), 4.82 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.65-4.50 (m, 2H), 3.62 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 4H), 3.53 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 2H), 2.89- 2.87 (m, 1H), 1.96- 1.86 (m, 6H), 1.32 (dd, J = 2.0, 4.4 Hz, 2H). 366.1 A
    108 0.32
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00170
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.85 (s, 2H), 6.75 (s, 2H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 5.57 (s, 1H), 4.78- 4.76 (m, 2H), 4.65 (s, 1H), 3.75 (dd, J = 7.3, 1.1 Hz, 1H), 3.66 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.47 (dd, J = 9.7, 1.3 Hz, 1H), 3.36 (s, 2H), 3.12 (d, J = 9.8 Hz, 1H), 2.90 (dt, J = 6.2, 2.8 Hz, 1H), 1.93- 1.82 (m, 4H), 1.33- 1.27 (m, 2H). 351 D
    109 0.48
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00171
         		No NMR 368 C
    110 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00172
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.91 (s, 2H), 6.99 (s, 2H), 6.30- 6.10 (m, 1H), 5.10- 4.90 (m, 1H), 4.83 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 1H), 4.70- 4.64 (m, 1H), 3.85- 3.76 (m, 1H), 3.66- 3.64 (m, 1H), 3.45- 3.38 (m, 4H), 2.91- 2.87 (m, 1H), 1.93- 1.86 (m, 4H), 1.34- 1.29 (m, 2H). 352.1 A
    111 0.15
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00173
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 7.08 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 1H), 4.29-4.21 (m, 1H), 3.96-3.91 (m, 2H), 3.63-3.48 (m, 2H), 3.43 (td, J = 11.2, 3.4 Hz, 2H), 2.78-2.70 (m, 1H), 2.09-1.96 (m, 2H), 1.92-1.85 (m, 1H), 1.82-1.73 (m, 4H), 1.71-1.64 (m, 1H), 1.25 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 3H). 341 C
    112 0.06
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00174
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 7.08 (s, 2H), 6.98 (s, 1H), 4.25 (dd, J = 6.1, 4.2 Hz, 1H), 3.94 (dd, J = 9.7, 2.3 Hz, 2H), 3.64- 3.49 (m, 2H), 3.43 (td, J = 11.3, 3.1 Hz, 2H), 2.79-2.69 (m, 1H), 2.10-1.95 (m, 2H), 1.91-1.72 (m, 5H), 1.72-1.63 (m, 1H), 1.25 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, 3H). 341 C
    113 0.74
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00175
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.75 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 6.96 (s, 1H), 6.11 (s, 1H), 5.64 (s, 2H), 4.74- 4.67 (m, 4H), 4.38- 4.23 (m, 3H), 3.93- 3.90 (m, 2H), 3.63- 3.56 (m, 1H), 3.35 (s, 3H), 2.98 (d, J = 10.8 Hz, 2H), 2.54-2.46 (m, 1H), 2.06-1.99 (m, 2H), 1.93-1.88 (m, 4H). 464.0 F
    114 0.69
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00176
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.76 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 6.89 (s, 1H), 6.14 (s, 1H), 5.53 (s, 2H), 4.74- 4.69 (m, 5H), 4.38- 4.31 (m, 2H), 4.20- 4.11 (m, 2H), 3.63- 3.60 (m, 1H), 3.00- 2.98 (m, 2H), 2.54- 2.49 (m, 1H), 2.04- 1.90 (m, 6H). 452.0 F
    115 0.49
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00177
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.52 (s, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 6.24 (s, 1H). 5.66-5.34 (m, 1H), 4.72-4.71 (m, 2H), 4.66-4.62 (m, 2H), 4.40-4.31 (m, 2H), 4.14-4.11 (m, 1H), 4.08-4.05 (m, 1H), 3.56-3.53 (m, 1H), 2.94-2.92 (m, 2H), 2.61-2.52 (m, 1H), 2.03-2.00 (m, 2H), 1.97-1.78 (m, 4H). 418.15 F
    116 1.61
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00178
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d4) δ 8.86 (s, 2H), 7.01 (s, 1H), 6.26 (s, 1H), 5.53-5.36 (m, 1H), 4.74-4.71 (m, 2H), 4.65-4.62 (m, 2H). 4.40-4.31 (m, 2H). 4.14-4.05 (m, 2H), 3.56-3.52 (m, 1H), 2.93 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 2H), 2.64-2.56 (m, 1H), 2.03-1.99 (m, 2H), 1.97-1.81 (m, 4H). 385.16 F
    117 0.71
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00179
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DM SO) δ 8.93 (s, 2H), 7.00 (s, 2H), 6.60 (s, 1H), 3.70-3.60 (m, 16H). 344 G
    118 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00180
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.56 (s, 1H), 8.01 (s, 1H), 6.71 (s, 1H), 6.57 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 4.97- 4.93 (m, 3H), 3.55 (s, 2H), 3.50-3.47 (m, 2H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 3.22 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.94- 2.92 (m, 1H), 2.72- 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.52- 2.50 (m, 2H), 2.32 (s, 1H), 2.09 (s, 2H), 1.98 (s, 2H), 1.46-1.44 (m, 2H). 459.15 C
    119 0.002
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00181
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.03 (s, 1H), 6.71 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.2 Hz, 1H), 4.96 (s, 3H), 3.97 (d, J = 12.0 Hz, 1H), 3.73 (s, 2H), 3.56 (s, 2H), 3.00-2.95 (m, 1H), 2.31 (s,2H), 2.07-2.00 (m, 5H), 1.72 (s, 1H), 1.60 (d, J = 3.6 Hz, 1H), 1.47 (s, 2H). 443.15 C
    120 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00182
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.95 (s, 2H), 6.65 (s, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 4.97 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 3.56 (s, 2H), 3.30 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H), 2.98-2.93 (m, 2H), 2.75 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.50 (s, 2H), 2.10 (s, 1H), 2.02 (s, 2H), 1.99 (s, 2H), 1.46-1.45 (m, 2H), 1.19 (s, 6H). 408.15 C
    121 0.003
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00183
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.03 (s, 1H), 6.72 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.2 Hz, 1H), 4.97- 4.93 (m, 3H), 4.71- 4.67 (m, 2H), 4.69- 4.61 (m, 2H), 3.82- 3.79 (m, 1H), 3.56 (s, 2H), 3.14 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.95-2.93 (m, 1H), 2.50 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.35-2.34 (m, 1H), 2.13 (s, 2H), 1.99 (s, 2H), 1.49-1.45 (m, 2H). 457.12 C
    122 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00184
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.86 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 6.71 (s, 1H), 4.98-4.92 (m, 1H), 4.69-4.62 (m, 2H), 4.62-4.59 (m, 2H), 3.82-3.75 (m, 1H), 3.55 (s, 2H), 3.12 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.93- 2.92 (m, 1H), 2.49 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.35- 2.33 (m, 1H), 2.12 (s, 2H), 2.00-1.98 (m, 2H), 1.45-1.43 (m, 2H). 458.9 C
    123 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00185
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.10 (s, 1H), 6.92 (s, 2H), 4.85-4.83 (m, 1H), 4.57-4.54 (m, 2H), 4.46-4.43 (m, 2H), 3.72-3.69 (m, 1H), 3.45 (s, 2H), 3.06 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.91-2.89 (m, 1H), 2.40 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.29 (s, 1H), 2.05 (s, 2H), 1.96 (s, 2H), 1.33-1.32 (m, 2H). 474.9 C
    124 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00186
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.04 (s, 1H), 7.19 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.2 Hz, 1H), 4.97 (s, 2H), 4.69-4.59 (m, 4H), 3.81-3.75 (m, 1H), 3.12 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.49 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.42-2.40 (m, 1H), 2.18-2.15 (m, 1H), 2.11 (s, 2H), 1.11- 1.08 (m, 2H), 1.00- 0.97 (m, 2H). 416.1 C
    125 0.11
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00187
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.53 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.14 (s, 1H), 6.52 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 4.93 (s, 2H), 3.26-3.20 (m, 2H), 3.05-3.00 (m, 2H), 2.71 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.27-2.25 (m, 1H), 2.11-2.10 (m, 1H), 2.04 (s, 2H), 1.18- 1.03 (m, 2H), 0.96- 0.91 (m, 2H). 442.1 C
    126 0.003
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00188
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.55 (s, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 7.17 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.2 Hz, 1H), 4.96 (s, 2H), 3.46 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.36 (s, 3H), 3.21 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 2H), 2.70- 2.67 (m, 2H), 2.49 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.38 (s, 1H), 2.17-2.15 (m, 1H), 2.06 (s, 2H), 1.11- 1.18 (m, 2H), 0.99- 0.96 (m, 2H). 418.2 C
    127 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00189
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.60 (s, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.18 (s, 1H), 6.60 (t, J = 73.2 Hz, 1H), 4.99 (s, 2H), 3.30 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 2.92-2.85 (m, 1H), 2.75 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 2.51 (s, 2H), 2.34 (s, 1H), 2.20-2.16 (m, 1H), 2.10 (s, 2H), 1.19 (s, 6H), 1.14-1.11 (m, 2H), 1.10-1.00 (m, 2H). 432.2 C
    128 0.008
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00190
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) δ 8.57 (s, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 6.69 (s, 1H), 6.58 (t, J = 73.6 Hz, 1H), 5.01- 4.94 (m, 3H), 3.98 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H), 3.75- 3.66 (m, 2H), 3.57- 3.55 (m, 3H), 2.95- 2.94 (m, 1H), 2.32- 2.26 (m, 4H), 2.00 (s, 2H), 1.70-1.68 (m, 1H), 1.46-1.45 (m, 2H), 1.16 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 3H). 457.15 C
    129 0.001
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00191
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.60 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.17 (t, J = 73.8 Hz, 1H), 6.43 (s, 2H), 5.51-5.30 (m, 1H), 4.99 (s, 1H),, 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.93-3.74 (m, 3H), 3.74-3.44 (m, 4H), 3.35 (s, 1H), 2.28- 2.01 (m, 2H), 1.92- 1.82 (m, 2H). 423 E
    130 0.022
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00192
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.59 (s, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 7.16 (t, 1H), 6.41 (s, 2H), 4.98 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 4.06-3.99 (m, 1H), 3.78 (d, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.70-3.53 (m, 4H), 3.46 (d, J = 10.1 Hz, 2H3.35 (s, 1H), 3.26(s, 3H), 2.06-1.93 (m, 2H), 1.86 (s, 2H). 435 E
    131 0.01
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00193
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.57 (s, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.15 (t, 1H), 6.43 (s, 2H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 3.95 (s, 4H), 3.77 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.64 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.43 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 1H), 3.35 (s, 1H), 2.15 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 4H), 1.91-1.71 (m, 4H). 431 E
    132 0.014
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00194
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.59 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.16 (t, J = 73.8 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (s, 2H), 4.98 (s, 1H), 4.66 (s, 1H), 4.50 (t, J = 5.6 Hz, 1H), 3.85 (q, J = 7.4 Hz, 1H), 3.81- 3.68 (m, 4H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.59- 3.50 (m, 1H), 3.45 (d, J = 10.1 Hz, 1H), 3.35 (s, 1H), 2.99-2.87 (m, 1H), 2.14-1.98 (m, 1H), 1.93-1.73 (m, 3H). 447 E
    133 0.08
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00195
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.58 (s, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.37- 6.94 (m, 1H), 6.45 (s, 2H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.67 (s, 1H), 3.97-3.89 (m, 2H), 3.85-3.73 (m, 3H), 3.65 (d, J = 7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.44 (d, J = 10.4 Hz, 1H), 3.40-3.30 (m, 1H), 3.20 (s, 3H), 1.86 (s, 2H), 1.44 (s, 3H). 435 E
    134 0.02
    Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00196
         		1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.53 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, J = 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (t, J = 74.0 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (s, 1H), 6.35 (br s, 2H), 4.62- 4.50 (m, 2H), 4.45- 4.32 (m, 2H), 3.82- 3.70 (m, 1H), 3.70- 3.60 (m, 3H), 3.28- 3.23 (m, 2H), 2.17- 2.03 (m, 1H), 1.05- 0.85 (m, 4H) J
    • Example 3
  • DLK TR-FRET inhibition assay: DLK kinase reactions (20 μL) containing 5 nM N-terminally GST-tagged DLK (catalytic domain amino acid 1-520) (Carna Bioscience), 40 nM N-terminally HIS-tagged MKK4 K131M substrate, and 30 μM ATP in kinase reaction buffer (50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 0.01% Triton X-100, 0.01% Bovine γ-Globulins, 2 mM DTT, 10 mM MgCl2 and 1 mM EGTA), and testing compound 1:3 serial diluted starting at 20 uM were incubated at ambient temperature for 60 minutes in 384 well OptiPlate (Perkin Elmer). To quench kinase reactions and detect phosphorylated MKK4, 15 μL of TR-FRET antibody mixture containing 2 nM anti-phosphorylated MKK4 labeled with Europium cryptate (Cisbio) and 23 nM anti-HIS labeled with D2 (Cisbio) in detection buffer (25 mM Tris pH 7.5, 100 mM NaCl, 100 mM EDTA, 0.01% Tween-20, and 200 mM KF) was added to the reaction mixture. The detection mixture was incubated for 3 hours at ambient temperature and the TR-FRET was detected with an EnVision multilabel plate reader (Perkin-Elmer) using the LANCE/DELFIA Dual Enh label from Perkin-Elmer (excitation filter: UV2 (TRF) 320 and emission filters: APC 665 and Europium 615). Compounds of formula I as set forth in Table 1 in Example 1 inhibited the DLK kinase with the Ks in micromolar (μM).

Claims (29)

1. Compounds of formula (I)
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00197
or salts thereof wherein
R1, R2 and R3 are each independently H, F, Cl, Br, I, C1-6 alkyl or C1-6 haloalkyl;
X1 is N;
X2 is N or CH;
A is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 dialkylamino, 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein A is optionally substituted with 1-5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LA)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LA)0-1-C6 aryl, -(LA)0-1-NRR1aRR1b, -(LA)0-1-ORR1a, -(LA)0-1-SRR1a, -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═Y1)ORR1c, -(LA)0-1-OC(═O)N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═O)N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-C(═O)N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)C(═O)RR1b, -(LA)0-1-C(═O)ORR1a, -(LA)0-1-OC(═O)RR1a, -(LA)0-1-P(═O)(ORR1a)(ORR1b), -(LA)0-1-S(O)1-2RR1c, -(LA)0-1—S(O)1-2N(RR1a)(RR1b), -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)S(O)1-2N(RR1a)(RR1b) and -(LA)0-1-N(RR1a)S(O)1-2(RR1c), wherein LA is selected from the group consisting of C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 heteroalkylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene, C2-4 alkenylene, and C2-4 alkynylene; wherein RR1a and RR1b are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3-8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl; RR1c is selected from the group consisting of C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3 to 8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, and wherein RA is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with RRA substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4(halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino; and
Cy is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered cycloalkyl, 3 to 12 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein Cy is optionally substituted on carbon or heteroatoms with RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, —NO2, —SF5, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, C1-8 heteroalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered cycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-3-8 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(LCy)0-1-5 to 6 membered heteroaryl, -(LCy)0-1-phenyl, -(LCy)0-1-NRRCaRRCb, -(LCy)0-1-ORRCa, -(LCy)0-1-SRRCa, -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═Y1)ORRCc, -(LCy)0-1-OC(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-C(═O)N(RRCa)(RRCb), -(LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)C(═O)RRCb, -(LCy)0-1-C(═O)ORRCa, -(LCy)0-1-OC(═O)RRCa, -(LCy)0-1-P(═O)(ORRCa)(ORRCb), -(LCy)0-1-S(O)1-2RRCc, -(LCy)0-1-S(O)1-2N(RRCa)(RRCb), (LCy)0-1-N(RRCa)S(O)1-2N(RRCa)(RRCb) and -(LCY)0-1—N(RRCa)S(O)1-2(RRCc), wherein LCy is selected from the group consisting of C1-4 alkylene, C1-4 heteroalkylene, C1-4 alkoxylene, C1-4 aminoalkylene, C1-4 thioalkylene, C2-4 alkenylene, and C2-4 alkynylene; wherein RRCa and RRCb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3-8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 8 membered heterocycloalkyl; RRCc is selected from the group consisting of C1-8 alkyl, C1-8 haloalkyl, 3 to 8 membered cycloalkyl, phenyl, benzyl, 5 to 6 membered heteroaryl and 3 to 7 membered heterocycloalkyl, and wherein RCy is optionally substituted on carbon atoms and heteroatoms with from 1 to 5 RRCy substitutents selected from, F, Cl, Br, I, —NH2, —OH, —CN, —NO2, ═O, —SF5, C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, C1-4(halo)alkyl-C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)S(O)0-2—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-S(O)0-2N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—S(O)0-2N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-C(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, C1-4 (halo)alkyl-OC(═O)N(H)—, (halo)alkyl-N(H)—C(═O)O—, ((halo)alkyl)2N—C(═O)O—, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 alkylamino and C1-4 dialkylamino.
2-4. (canceled)
5. A compound of claim 1, wherein X2 is N.
6. A compound of claim 1, wherein X2 is C(H).
7-12. (canceled)
13. A compound of claim 1, wherein R1, R2 and R3 are each independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, CN, hydrogen, C1-4 alkyl and C1-4 haloalkyl.
14. A compound of claim 1, wherein R1, R2 and R3 are each hydrogen.
15. A compound of claim 1, wherein A and Cy are independently selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-furo[3,2-c]pyrrole, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, cyclopropane, cyclopentane, 2-thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, tetrahydro-2H-pyran, 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane and 3-oxa-8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, and is optionally substituted.
16. A compound of claim 1, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolidine, piperidine, azetidine, azepane, piperazine, cyclopropane, cyclobutane, cyclopentane, 7-azaspiro[3.5]nonane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3,6-diazabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 2,7-diazaspiro[3.5]nonane, octahydrocyclopenta[c]pyrrole, 2-azaspiro[3.3]heptane, 2,5-diazaspiro[3.4]octane, 6-azaspiro[2.5]octane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, morpholine, hexahydro-2H-furo[3,2-c]pyrrole and 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, and is optionally substituted.
17. (canceled)
18. A compound of claim 1, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5 S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5 S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
19. A compound of claim 1, wherein is A is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, isopropyl,
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00198
20. A compound of claim 1, wherein Cy is selected from the group consisting of 2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine, 2-aza-tricyclo[3.3.1.1-3,7]decane, 2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 2-azabicyclo[2.1.1]hexane, 9-azabicyclo[4.2.1]nonane, 9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, cyclobutane, 2-Thia-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane 2,2-dioxide, 2-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, tetrahydro-2H-pyran, 8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, 3-oxa-8-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane, and is optionally substituted.
21. A compound of claim 1, wherein Cy is selected from the group consisting of azetidine, (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, (1R,5S)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, 3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1R,5S)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,5R)-3-oxabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane, (1S,4S)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane and (1R,4R)-2,5-diazabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and is optionally substituted.
22. A compound of claim 1, wherein Cy is selected from the group consisting of
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00199
23-27. (canceled)
28. A compound of claim of claim 1, wherein Cy is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 RCy substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, OH, 2,3-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 4-fluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3-fluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 3-fluoro-4-methyl-phen-1-yl-C(═O)—, 2,5-difluorophen-1-yl-C(═O)—, oxetane, oxetan-3-yl, thiazole, thiazol-2-yl, —CH3CH2C(═O)—, CH3C(═O)—, CF3CH2—, (HO)C(CH3)2CH2—, CH3OCH2CH2—, CH3OC(CH3)2C(═O)—, CH3OCH2C(═O)—, isopropyl, ethyl and methyl.
29. A compound of claim 1, wherein A is optionally substituted with 1 to 5 RA substituents selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, CN, CH3O—, CH3, cyclopropylmethyl, CF3 and butyl.
30. A compound of claim 1, wherein said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00200
31. (canceled)
32. A compound of claim 1, wherein said compound is selected from the subformula consisting of
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00201
wherein RCy if present replaces a hydrogen atom attached to a carbon or nitrogen atom of the Cy ring.
33. (canceled)
34. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 1, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
35-46. (canceled)
47. A method for decreasing the progression of a neurodegenerative disease or condition in a patient suffering therefrom comprising administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
4-49. (canceled)
50. The method of claim 47, wherein the compound of formula I is administered in combination with one or more additional pharmaceutical agents.
51. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, said compound selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00202
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00203
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00204
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00205
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00206
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00207
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00208
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00209
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00210
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00211
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00212
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00213
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00214
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00215
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00216
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00217
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00218
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00219
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00220
Figure US20200171029A1-20200604-C00221
52. A method of preparing a compound of claim 1.
US16/568,130 2013-05-01 2019-09-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof Abandoned US20200171029A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/568,130 US20200171029A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2019-09-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201361817966P 2013-05-01 2013-05-01
US14/267,011 US9266862B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2014-05-01 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/041,375 US10028954B2 (en) 2013-04-30 2016-02-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/852,235 US20180117044A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2017-12-22 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US16/568,130 US20200171029A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2019-09-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/852,235 Continuation US20180117044A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2017-12-22 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20200171029A1 true US20200171029A1 (en) 2020-06-04

Family

ID=51841525

Family Applications (8)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/267,011 Active US9266862B2 (en) 2013-04-30 2014-05-01 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US14/927,267 Active US10010549B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2015-10-29 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/041,375 Active US10028954B2 (en) 2013-04-30 2016-02-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/852,235 Abandoned US20180117044A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2017-12-22 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/868,301 Abandoned US20180133219A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-01-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/902,746 Active USRE47848E1 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-02-22 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US16/568,130 Abandoned US20200171029A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2019-09-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US16/666,273 Active US11129832B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2019-10-28 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Family Applications Before (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/267,011 Active US9266862B2 (en) 2013-04-30 2014-05-01 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US14/927,267 Active US10010549B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2015-10-29 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/041,375 Active US10028954B2 (en) 2013-04-30 2016-02-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/852,235 Abandoned US20180117044A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2017-12-22 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/868,301 Abandoned US20180133219A1 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-01-11 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US15/902,746 Active USRE47848E1 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-02-22 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/666,273 Active US11129832B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2019-10-28 Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Country Status (23)

Country Link
US (8) US9266862B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2991978A4 (en)
JP (4) JP6229042B2 (en)
KR (2) KR101836431B1 (en)
CN (2) CN105431420B (en)
AR (1) AR096151A1 (en)
AU (2) AU2014261894C1 (en)
BR (1) BR112015027055B1 (en)
CA (1) CA2911051C (en)
CL (1) CL2015003147A1 (en)
CR (2) CR20200177A (en)
EA (3) EA029568B8 (en)
HK (1) HK1219276A1 (en)
IL (2) IL296526A (en)
MA (3) MA42164B1 (en)
MX (1) MX2015015130A (en)
MY (1) MY182082A (en)
PE (2) PE20200447A1 (en)
PH (1) PH12015502410A1 (en)
SG (2) SG10201707002VA (en)
TW (3) TWI710558B (en)
UA (1) UA121016C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2014177060A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2870049C (en) * 2012-05-03 2020-12-29 Charles Baker-Glenn Pyrazole aminopyrimidine derivatives as lrrk2 modulators
JP6199991B2 (en) * 2013-01-18 2017-09-20 エフ．ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲーＦ． Ｈｏｆｆｍａｎｎ−Ｌａ Ｒｏｃｈｅ Ａｋｔｉｅｎｇｅｓｅｌｌｓｃｈａｆｔ Trisubstituted pyrazoles and use as DLK inhibitors
MX2015015130A (en) 2013-05-01 2016-02-18 Hoffmann La Roche Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof.
CA2907912A1 (en) * 2013-05-01 2014-11-06 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag C-linked heterocycloalkyl substituted pyrimidines and their uses
MX2016008110A (en) * 2013-12-20 2016-08-19 Hoffmann La Roche Pyrazole derivatives and uses thereof as inhibitors of dlk.
CN104926716A (en) * 2015-06-10 2015-09-23 哈尔滨工业大学 Pyridine derivative 2,6-di[(6-methoxy pyridine-2-yl)methyl] pyridine and synthesis method thereof
KR20190040068A (en) * 2016-08-29 2019-04-16 보드 오브 리전츠 더 유니버시티 오브 텍사스 시스템 Inhibitors of Dual Leucine Zipper (DLK) Kinase for the Treatment of Diseases
EP3551610B1 (en) 2016-12-08 2021-08-11 Board of Regents, The University of Texas System Bicyclo[1.1.1]pentane inhibitors of dual leucine zipper (dlk) kinase for the treatment of disease
AR112274A1 (en) 2017-07-14 2019-10-09 Hoffmann La Roche BICYCLIC KETONE COMPOUNDS AND THEIR METHODS OF USE
EP3694858B1 (en) 2017-10-11 2023-01-11 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Bicyclic compounds for use as rip1 kinase inhibitors
EP3697776B1 (en) * 2017-10-17 2023-04-19 Palau Pharma, S.L.U. Synthesis of 4-aminopyrimidine compounds
EP3704097B1 (en) 2017-10-31 2023-10-25 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Bicyclic sulfones and sulfoxides and methods of use thereof
CN112074519A (en) 2018-04-20 2020-12-11 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 N- [ 4-oxo-2, 3-dihydro-1, 5-benzoxazepin-3-yl ] -5, 6-dihydro-4H-pyrrolo [1,2-B ] pyrazole-2-carboxamide derivatives and related compounds as RIP1 kinase inhibitors for the treatment of e.g. Irritable Bowel Syndrome (IBS)
CN113302193A (en) 2019-01-11 2021-08-24 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Bicyclic pyrrolotriazolone compounds and methods of use thereof
KR20210123337A (en) * 2019-01-31 2021-10-13 더 내셔널 인스티튜츠 오브 파마슈티컬 알앤디 컴퍼니 리미티드 Aromatic ring or heteroaromatic ring compound, preparation method thereof and medical use thereof
US11560366B2 (en) 2019-10-21 2023-01-24 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Bicyclo[1.1.1]pentane inhibitors of dual leucine zipper (DLK) kinase for the treatment of disease
CN116744933A (en) * 2020-10-02 2023-09-12 基因泰克公司 Methods for preparing bisheteroaryl compounds and crystalline forms thereof
WO2023034808A1 (en) * 2021-09-01 2023-03-09 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Mixed lineage kinase inhibitors and methods of use
WO2023067550A1 (en) * 2021-10-20 2023-04-27 Yousef Najajreh Allosteric inhibitor compounds for overcoming cancer resistance

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9266862B2 (en) * 2013-05-01 2016-02-23 Genentech, Inc. Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Family Cites Families (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3773919A (en) 1969-10-23 1973-11-20 Du Pont Polylactide-drug mixtures
US4485045A (en) 1981-07-06 1984-11-27 Research Corporation Synthetic phosphatidyl cholines useful in forming liposomes
EP0102324A3 (en) 1982-07-29 1984-11-07 Ciba-Geigy Ag Lipids and surfactants in an aqueous medium
US4544545A (en) 1983-06-20 1985-10-01 Trustees University Of Massachusetts Liposomes containing modified cholesterol for organ targeting
HUT35524A (en) 1983-08-02 1985-07-29 Hoechst Ag Process for preparing pharmaceutical compositions containing regulatory /regulative/ peptides providing for the retarded release of the active substance
US5004697A (en) 1987-08-17 1991-04-02 Univ. Of Ca Cationized antibodies for delivery through the blood-brain barrier
US5112596A (en) 1990-04-23 1992-05-12 Alkermes, Inc. Method for increasing blood-brain barrier permeability by administering a bradykinin agonist of blood-brain barrier permeability
US5268164A (en) 1990-04-23 1993-12-07 Alkermes, Inc. Increasing blood-brain barrier permeability with permeabilizer peptides
DE69328430T2 (en) 1992-07-27 2001-01-25 Us Health TARGETED LIPOSOME TO THE BLOOD BRAIN CABINET
US6514221B2 (en) 2000-07-27 2003-02-04 Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Blood-brain barrier opening
AU2001286930A1 (en) 2000-08-30 2002-03-13 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Glucocorticoid blocking agents for increasing blood-brain barrier permeability
US7034036B2 (en) 2000-10-30 2006-04-25 Pain Therapeutics, Inc. Inhibitors of ABC drug transporters at the blood-brain barrier
DE10121982B4 (en) 2001-05-05 2008-01-24 Lts Lohmann Therapie-Systeme Ag Nanoparticles of protein with coupled apolipoprotein E to overcome the blood-brain barrier and process for their preparation
US20030129186A1 (en) 2001-07-25 2003-07-10 Biomarin Pharmaceutical Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating blood-brain barrier transport
US20030162695A1 (en) 2002-02-27 2003-08-28 Schatzberg Alan F. Glucocorticoid blocking agents for increasing blood-brain barrier permeability
AU2003293310B2 (en) 2002-09-30 2010-04-01 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Fused azole-pyrimidine derivatives
CA2791165C (en) 2002-12-03 2015-02-24 Blanchette Rockefeller Neurosciences Institute A conjugate comprising cholesterol linked to tetracycline
EP1663239A4 (en) 2003-09-10 2008-07-23 Cedars Sinai Medical Center Potassium channel mediated delivery of agents through the blood-brain barrier
GB0508471D0 (en) 2005-04-26 2005-06-01 Celltech R&D Ltd Therapeutic agents
JO2660B1 (en) * 2006-01-20 2012-06-17 نوفارتيس ايه جي PI-3 Kinase inhibitors and methods of their use
WO2008064244A2 (en) 2006-11-20 2008-05-29 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Phosphoinositide modulation for the treatment of neurodegenerative diseases
ATE551334T1 (en) 2007-02-06 2012-04-15 Novartis Ag PI3-KINASE INHIBITORS AND METHODS OF USE THEREOF
RU2474580C2 (en) 2007-07-19 2013-02-10 Шеринг Корпорейшн Heterocyclic amide compounds as protein kinase inhibitors
WO2009066084A1 (en) * 2007-11-21 2009-05-28 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag 2 -morpholinopyrimidines and their use as pi3 kinase inhibitors
US20100056609A1 (en) 2008-08-26 2010-03-04 Washington University Methods and compositions for inhibition of axonal degeneration by modulation of the dlk/jnk pathway
MX2011004585A (en) * 2008-10-31 2011-06-01 Novartis Ag Combination of a phosphatidylinositol-3-kinase (pi3k) inhibitor and a mtor inhibitor.
GB2465405A (en) * 2008-11-10 2010-05-19 Univ Basel Triazine, pyrimidine and pyridine analogues and their use in therapy
CA2773848A1 (en) * 2009-09-09 2011-03-17 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. Pi3 kinase inhibitors and uses thereof
KR20120102642A (en) 2009-10-22 2012-09-18 제넨테크, 인크. Modulation of axon degeneration
GB201004200D0 (en) 2010-03-15 2010-04-28 Univ Basel Spirocyclic compounds and their use as therapeutic agents and diagnostic probes
CN103153994B (en) 2010-05-24 2016-02-10 罗切斯特大学 Bicyclic heteroaryl kinase inhibitor and using method
CN103501610A (en) * 2011-03-09 2014-01-08 西建阿维拉米斯研究公司 Pi3 kinase inhibitors and uses thereof
CN103483345B (en) 2013-09-25 2016-07-06 中山大学 PI3K inhibitors of kinases, the pharmaceutical composition comprising it and application thereof
JP5920747B1 (en) 2015-04-07 2016-05-18 エイピーエス．エスエイ Application programs and cards

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10028954B2 (en) * 2013-04-30 2018-07-24 Genentech, Inc. Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US9266862B2 (en) * 2013-05-01 2016-02-23 Genentech, Inc. Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20160003241A (en) 2016-01-08
EA201991064A1 (en) 2020-02-28
TW201800403A (en) 2018-01-01
PE20161063A1 (en) 2016-10-22
JP2016518383A (en) 2016-06-23
US11129832B2 (en) 2021-09-28
EA033084B1 (en) 2019-08-30
IL242164B (en) 2021-04-29
TW201506018A (en) 2015-02-16
AU2019200249B2 (en) 2020-10-15
WO2014177060A1 (en) 2014-11-06
EA029568B8 (en) 2018-08-31
EA029568B1 (en) 2018-04-30
PE20200447A1 (en) 2020-02-28
MY182082A (en) 2021-01-18
JP6655052B2 (en) 2020-02-26
SG11201509027WA (en) 2015-12-30
PH12015502410A1 (en) 2016-02-22
MA42164B1 (en) 2019-12-31
AU2014261894A1 (en) 2015-10-29
BR112015027055A8 (en) 2020-01-14
US20160158234A1 (en) 2016-06-09
KR20180026806A (en) 2018-03-13
EP2991978A1 (en) 2016-03-09
CR20200177A (en) 2020-06-28
KR101836431B1 (en) 2018-03-09
BR112015027055A2 (en) 2017-07-25
US10010549B2 (en) 2018-07-03
JP2023011775A (en) 2023-01-24
SG10201707002VA (en) 2017-10-30
TWI710558B (en) 2020-11-21
MA48577A1 (en) 2021-03-31
US20180133219A1 (en) 2018-05-17
MA38624A1 (en) 2017-02-28
AU2019200249A1 (en) 2019-01-31
CL2015003147A1 (en) 2016-06-17
EA201792471A1 (en) 2018-04-30
AR096151A1 (en) 2015-12-09
CA2911051C (en) 2021-08-17
CA2911051A1 (en) 2014-11-06
EA201592060A1 (en) 2016-02-29
USRE47848E1 (en) 2020-02-11
US20160052940A1 (en) 2016-02-25
CN105431420A (en) 2016-03-23
US20170239246A9 (en) 2017-08-24
MX2015015130A (en) 2016-02-18
CN105431420B (en) 2019-08-13
CN110003178A (en) 2019-07-12
NZ750661A (en) 2020-11-27
EA038235B1 (en) 2021-07-28
HK1219276A1 (en) 2017-03-31
EP2991978A4 (en) 2016-09-14
UA121016C2 (en) 2020-03-25
MA42164A1 (en) 2019-01-31
BR112015027055B1 (en) 2023-09-26
KR102002265B1 (en) 2019-07-19
JP2020079264A (en) 2020-05-28
TWI622587B (en) 2018-05-01
JP2018035187A (en) 2018-03-08
US20200188397A1 (en) 2020-06-18
AU2014261894C1 (en) 2019-07-11
US9266862B2 (en) 2016-02-23
US20180117044A1 (en) 2018-05-03
CN110003178B (en) 2022-02-25
NZ712934A (en) 2020-10-30
US10028954B2 (en) 2018-07-24
TW201841907A (en) 2018-12-01
CR20150589A (en) 2015-12-07
US20140328805A1 (en) 2014-11-06
AU2014261894B2 (en) 2018-10-18
IL296526A (en) 2022-11-01
JP6229042B2 (en) 2017-11-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
USRE47848E1 (en) Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US10028942B2 (en) 3-substituted pyrazoles and uses thereof
US9868720B2 (en) C-linked heterocycloaklyl substituted pyrimidines and their uses
US9399636B2 (en) Substituted dipyridylamines and uses thereof
US9365583B2 (en) Substituted pyrazoles and uses thereof
NZ750661B2 (en) Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
NZ712934B2 (en) Biheteroaryl compounds and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION